The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutWillard Straight Hall - Accessible DoorsEl h Construction Documents: rst Room Exit Access Doorway Willard Straight Hall ABBRE V IATIONS aFF ac add 1 a/c approx bsmt brg bm blkg bot brdg bldg cab cpt csmt c,b c,ig ct CO c los COI cont cmu cs jt cont c jt cmp crs det dia dim dr4 dbl dh dwg dr e lev eq equip eXh exg exp jt ext Above Finish Floor Acoustical Additional Air Conditioning Alternate Approximate Basement Bearing Bench Mark. Blocking Both Ways Bottom Bridging Building Cabinet Carpet Casement Catch Bosin Ceiling Center to Center Ceramic Tile Clean Out Closet Column Concrete Concrete Masonry Unit Construction Joint Continuous Control Joint Corrugated Metal Pipe Courses Detail Diameter Dimension Dishwasher Double Double Hung (Window) Drawing Prinking Fountain Elevation Equal Equipment Exhaust Existing Expansion Joint Exterior For Fom Fos Fin FC F Ir Fd Ftg Fnd Frz Furn Face OF Finish Face OF Masonry Face OF Studs Finish(ed) Finish Coat Floor Floor Proin Footing Foundation Freezer Furnace gay Galvanized go Gauge gl &lass or Glazing gFi Ground Fault Interrupter gPdt4 Gypsum Board hcp hdy., ht htr hvac hm hor hb id insul int inv isjt jt mFr mo mat max mech mti min misc n/a nic nts oc opng opp od oh Handicap Hardware Height Heater Heating/Ventilation/ Air Conditioning Hollow Metal Horizontal Hose Bibb Inside Diameter Insulation Interior Invert Isolation Joint Joint Manurac,turer Mosonry Opening Material Maximum Mechonical Metal Minimum Miscellaneous Not Applicable Not In Contract Not To Scale On Center Opening Opposite Outside Diameter Overhead pn l pnt d perF plas p lam PI prvd pvc. PP prov pt qty qL reinF rcp rvt ra reFr rev rd rm ro ru son shr shth sim spec stn st stl str tmpr thk tag t/o Ftg t/o pl t/o stl t/o NOII typ uon vr vert viF v wwr Nilo Pane 1 Paint(ed) Penny PerForated Plaster Plastic. Laminate Plate Plywood Polyvinyl Chloride Power Pole Provide Pressure Treated Quantity Quarry Tile -ReinForcing -ReinForced Concrete Pipe -ReinForced Vinyl Tile -Return Air -ReFrIgerator 'Revision. Revised -RooF Drain Room Rough Opening -Rubber Sanitary Shower Sheathing Similar SpeciFication Stain(ed) Stainless Steel Structural Tempered Thickness Tongue and Groove Top OF Footing Top OF Plate Top OF Steel Top OF Wall Typical Unless Otherwise Noted Vapor-Retorder Vertical VeriFy In Field Vinyl Water Closet WaterrooF Welded Wire Fabric With Without Wood -FOR Cornell University Campus Life, Cornell Dining Ithaca NY 14853 LOCATION MAP Le kp E.,4`4i*/* 1„h14 V If/ 4titY .".Itt'pt stt• - ktIttott Itt.‘ tt-tt tt ,t.,ti,tottersg'ty u 1...tuartt 4.•••• ****** \ lttnv r.:.ritooe tAttltit101 1,owtter thIttlt, 18',4robrIrr,r St1,titt, Iftti [11,0 416N66 ,00e' ONO°. 1,3tttti,,rn T N1Tkd !wch5°11t'':;:t.trq't,t''t:ittZtttl Ittrifi 1111 110 1„ ttolt,ttt. Lktt-t-t-Itt-tt1 011rt-r' * 4.11* 12,01.1t4f **Tr*„4•I"Pl'i.-1%1 4fLrl,'*411''''*4'1: i 4t4 (traItt.ttite !,t,tttitt‘tit'tcti '''.'' 91. or l'oi,dr-444444***kt'v'l SEP**4 tlfll1t 3r4J, itiM7-4X10't*,41 1 tttl1r1t1 em 1 B6 66 tertt,tt Itte-rfrttttit',,,eit t‘ttbt,1 ,t,t, LI4 il TA-6,tt 11s .1*,"414,444,i'S 4`414.1 *:43-141-,44 44, . ................. ......................................................... ........ 11 1101y :.,,tt!tt*tPt,,ftttttttttltttttttltttttitttttttttt.ttitttttttttttt:!::!.::..tttttttttt:t't.:::::..::t:::tt.::.:.:tt:.:::t::.....:.tttttttitttttttttttttttttttttttttttt,tttt..,tit:::tttgttttttttttttttttttttttitllttttttt,t,i<tttttttttttittgtttttittt:::::::tttt::t::l.::;t1:::.:.::::::tttititittttttitltlttltl'titlilitltttttttt,:::::::,.t..:::t:::jlt.:::::::::.::..tttttlttttltt.ttititttfttltf:tt!ftlt.ltttlttttgttlttt!tt:!!tttlt!ttttttitttttt Plan -Hillard Straight Hall MATERIALS *iftt.„44.,, • .44,411 Porous Fill Concrete Metal (Small Scale) Welded Wire Fabric. Metal (Large Scale) Earth Wood (Rough) (Nominal Size Shown at Large Scale Only) Wood (Finished) Concrete Masonry Units Insulation (Rigid) Insulation (Batt/Blanket) SYMBOLS 103 T.O.S. = 100,-0” Window Type Door Number Room Number Revision Point Elev, Property Line Gridline ---- Contour Line '• Existing Proposed Interior Elevation Section Section Number Direction Shown Where drawn Detail Detail Number Where drawn Area to be Drawn INDEX OF DRAWINGS T-10 CS -10 A -I0 A-20 A-30 A-50 A-51 F -II M -II E -II Title Sheet Key Plan and Code Study Plans Interior Elevations Shoring Details Details Fire Protection Floor Plans Mechanical Floor Plans Electrical Floor Plans WARNING: DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING THOSE IN ELECTRONIC FORM, PREPARED BY BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC ARE INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE FOR USE SOLELY WITH RESPECT TO THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY WERE CREATED. THE ARCHITECT RETAINS ALL COMMON LAW, STATUTORY AND OTHER RESERVED RIGHTS, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT. FOR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND ELECTRONIC MEDIA. IT ISA VIOLATION OF TITLE VII, PART 69.5(B) OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT TO ALTER THIS DRAWING. IF ALTERED, SUCH ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX HIS SEAL, SIGNATURE, THE DATE, THE NOTATION "ALTERED BY", AND THE SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION. WHERE DRAWINGS, ON PAPER OR ELECTRONIC MEDIA, SHOW EXISTING, NEW, AND/OR PROPOSED WORK AND CONDITIONS, IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT IT IS SO SHOWN AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION AND THAT THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT, WHILE BELIEVING SUCH INFORMATION TO BE SUBSTANTIALLY CORRECT, ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY THEREFORE. THE USER SHALL MAKE THEMSELVES FAMILIAR WITH ALL CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE NATURE AND MANNER OF THEIR WORK INCLUDING VERIFICATION OF ALL DIMENSIONS LOCATING EXISTING, PROPOSED, AND/OR NEW WORK AND CONDITIONS. c ye CW Engineering 128 Hogan Road Fairport, NY 14450 585-223-2462 6 , date BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC 32 Winthrop Street Rochester, New York 14607 (585) 262-2035 STAMP 6AT„ o C:i'‘' : :::::4' 6:1,4 Cl) ,„.. .., kr > , I, ' v 14' ' itS A, .,, ,,..„,_ , '1,;" - ' , .r . ',--C. tin.k— ' , . Or NE PROJECT TITLE: Elmhirst-Room - Exit Access Doorway Willard Straight Hall Ithaca, New 'York. SHEET TITLE: Title Sheet PROJECT NO.: i'lOIQ COPYRIGHT 2014 . __, AI , ENGINEER ,RLLO 5tructural Engineering Consultants I 653 EAT MAIN STREET ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14609 phone: (585) 482-8130 fax: (585) 482-0440 web site: wwvv.iensenbrv.com 0 li CLIENT / OWNER: Cornell University C,ompus Life, Cornell Dining Ithoca, NI- 14853 SHEET NUMBER/DATE: T March 24, 0 2014 c° I I | I- Stair Capacity 48" (.20) 240 Door Capacity Door Capacity 72^(15) Assembly (A-2) tables & chairs 4500 sf 15N 300 Elmhirst Room 303 G4"(15) 426 69 Assembly (A-2) tables & chairs Okenshields 302 2137 sf 15N 142 PROJECT LOCATION: Willard Straight Hall - bounded by McGraw Tower to the north, Ho Plaza to the east, Gannett Health Services to the south and Campus Road/West Avenue to the west. PROJECT DESCRIPTION: Work generally consists of the following: Repairs Repair decorative metal railing at existing stone stairs (Kimball). Alteration Level 2 ° Remove existing window and portion of existing masonry wall (Elmhirst). ° Remove existing raised floor structure (Kimball). ° Remove portions of existing stud/gpdw walls (Kimball & Okenshields). ° Provide doors, frames, side panels, and transom glazing (Bmhirst). ° Provide infill stud/gpdw wall (Kimball). ~ Provide cased openings (Kimball & Okenshields). ° Enlarged Worm Area Plan 1/10^=1.-0^ BUILDING DATA: Building : Description: Year Built: Building Area: Third Floor (gross): Project Work Area: Vo of total Floor area: Willard Straight Hall at Cornell University Ithaca, NY14853 Six -story building, with exterior masonry bea ring walls & interior steel frame. 1925 ± 113.A88sf ± 27,054 sf 2,080 sf 390 sf ± 200 sf 2,670 sf (Room 303 Elmhirst) (Room 302A Kimball) (portion of Room 302 - Okenshields) TOTAL 9.9% (2,670 / 27,000 = 0.099) APPLICABLE CONSTRUCTION CODES: Building Code of New York State Energy Code of New York State Existing Building Code of New York State Fire Code of New York State Fuel Gas Code of New York State Mechanical Code of New York State Plumbing Code of New York State Property Maintenance Code of New York State Barrier Free Sub -Code, ICC/ANSI A117.1 PATH OF CODE COMPLIANCE: - 2010 Edition - 2010 Edition - 2010 Edition - 2010 Edition - 2010 Edition - 2010 Edition - 2010 Edition - 2010 Edition - 2003 Edition Path mfdebr��'��'/,� removal to exg freight elevator Existing Building Code of New York State 101.5.2 Work Area Compliance Method (Applicable Chapters) Chapter 4 402 403 404 Classification of Work Repairs Alteration - Level 1 Alteration Level 2 (Chapter 5) (Chapter 6) (Chapter 7) New construction will comply with requirements of the Building Code of NYS. teniporary door to underside of existing ceiling. Provide negative air pressure during demolition operations. CODE DATA SUMMARY: Temporary partition, typ / Elmhirst Provide partitionstempora KKimball Room: ProNide temporary partitionsand��_ ' doors. Align partitions with existing wood beam ceiling grid and structure. Provide plastic Iid for temporary ceiling protection. / 1 \ Willard ard S+ra'ght Hall — Code Study Plan _ � S'�� 1/1O^= 1�O^ Building was constructed and subsequent alterations made in compliance with codes in existence at that time. Use Group: A-2, Assembly uses intended for food/drink consumption. Construction Type: Type I -B Fire Safety Building Height: Building Area: Existing Full Sprinkler System (per NFPA 13) assumed Existing Full Fire Alarm System (per NFPA 72) assumed Existing Code Compliant Emergency and Exit Lighting - assumed Basic permitted: Modification with sprinklers: Basic permitted: 11 stories 160' 12 stories - 180' UL (unlimited) Occupant Load: (current) Occupant Load: (proposed) Location Room 301 Ivy Room 301A Stone Palace Room 302 - Okenshields Room 302A - Kimball Room 303'Bmhinst Total Occupants 183* 49* 300* 31* 49* 612* * (Occupant load provided by Cornell University) Location Room 301 - Ivy Room 301A - Stone Palace Room 302 Okenshields Room 302A Kimball Room 303 Bmhiret Total Occupants 183* 49* 300* 26** 142** 700** (increase of 88 occupants) * (Occupant load provided by Cornell University ** (Calculated by Bero Architecture PLLC) CODE STUDY PLAN LEGEND: Occupant Load Symbol Residential bedroom 1024 sf 200G 6 Use Group Use Load Factor Occupant Load Area (sf) Door / Exit Capacity Symbol 38^(15) 240 12 Exit Access Travel Distance Symbol 76' Interior Work Area Repair Work BCNYS Section 1005 - Egress Width: Doors (calculated): 138 * 0.15 = 20.85^ Minimum required: 32.00" Actual (Elmhirst Room): 136.00^ Stairs (calculated): 138 * 0.20 = 27.60" Minimum required: 44.00" Actual: 48.00^ BCNYSSection 1U14.3'Common Path ofTravel: Permitted: 75' Actual: 10'-0^ Door / Exit Width (load factor) Door Exit Capacity Calculated Load Primary Egress Path Exit Access Max Travel Distance to Exit Access or Discharge (feet) BCNYS Section 1015.1 - Exit or Exit Access Doorways Req'd: Permitted: 2 (Elmhirst Room) Actual: 2 (Elmhirst Room) Alteration - Level 2 BCNYS Section 1015.2 - Exit or Exist Access Doorway Arrangment: Permitted: 1/3 of diagonal distance of Elmhirst Room 71''O^(881^)/3=23''11^(287^) BCNYSTabIe 1016.1 -Third FloorTravel Distance: Permitted with sprinklers: 250' Actual (Elmhirst Room): 82' @CNYSSection 10081.2'Door Swing: Door shall swing in direction of egress travel when serving an occupant load of 50 or more persons. BCNYS Section 1008.1.8 - Door Operations: Egress doorshall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. BCNYS Section 1008.1.8.3 - Locks and Latches: Exception 3 - Where egress doorare used in pairs, approved automatic flush bolts shall be permitted to be used, provided that the door leaf having the automatic flush bolts has no doorknob or surface -mounted hardware. BCNYS Section 1008.1.9 - Panic and Fire Exit Hardware: Each door in a means of egress from Group A occupancy having an occupant load of 50 or more shall not be provided with a latch or lock unless it is panic hardware or fire exit hardware. WARNING: PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY WERE CREATED. THE ARCHITECT RETAINS ALL COMMON Lmw.nwooro*vmvoo,oEno^nooITsoroREpuo*ns/wurnowswruO�usnvmEpun�Euu�u�rnRES��Tro�E OTHER RESERVED nmnro./momo/meoop,nmor. FOR ARCHITECTURAL on»w/weoAND ELECTRONIC wsom./rm^vmmrmwopnrLEvn.PART w.�o)opTHE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION /orxuoswaso ARCHITECT�^��.r��or^�/�"��o�r_��IF , SUCH ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX HIS ,��p��ir6��o"c��^[��i6"�-- — WHERE on»w�e�ump^psnons�ornum/owsow SHOW EXISTING, ms�mvmonp�opooso�onx AND CONDITIONS, //mUNDERSTOOD THAT ///SuvSHOWN *uaMATTER u,INFORMATION AND THAT THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT, WHILE BELIEVING SUCH INFORMATION TO BE SUBSTANTIALLY CORRECT, ASSUME wo THE USER SHALL MAKE THEMSELVESRESPONSIBILITY WITH AFFECTING THE N�UR�AN��A�ER�F��IR WORK INCLUDING VERIFICATION OF ALL LOCATING EXISTING, PROPOSED, AND/OR NEW WORK AND CONDITIONS. ��8� Structural Engineering Consultants /�53 �A5T��A|WST��T �OCM�TER.NEW YORK /40D9 phone: (585)482-8130 fax: (585)482-0440 web site: wwwJensenhrv.com C date BERO IIIETRE �_�7[ 7[ m~`� K�' U � U � .- �� 32 Winthrop Street Rochester, New York 146O7 (585) 262-2035 STAMP - PROJECT TITLE: E|nhirst fRoon — Exit Access [ccrHoq k�||�r� �tr��ht H�|| Ithaca, Nei—i York SHEET TITLE: �sy p|anm�w�'s�r��a�o��c�M��/��n�/w��mF�� and Cods Study PROJECT NO.: 400 COPYRIGHT 2014 ( ye � ��\8/ ��O.�]��.�]O `^," Engineering ' ^^ 128 Hogan Road ^ ' .^ Fairport, JY 144=0 585-223-2462 ~- GATe - 0259/0 -2 .>c cuswr/oWwem Cornell University Compus Lifs' Cornell Dining |thoco Nf 14&55 SHEET CS -- March 24, 2014 � 1 0 /\ o 4 0 q1-0" \ / 2'-0" 0 Ok nshields 302 mlmilan k ReFlec,ted Collin° 1/8" = 1 - 0" Ion 0 '5) c x c Elmhirst -Room 303 /\ -Reflected Ceiling Plan Notes:1 0 Suspended acoustical panel ceiling to match existing adjacent finish - one hour rated. ® Suspended acoustic, panel ceiling - one hour rated. O Line of sloped soFfit, refer to A-31. 0 Wood cased soffit to match existing adjacent exactly. Existing soffit to remain. Paint to Finish banquette wall. Existing ceiling tile to remain. Existing ceiling treatment to remain. O Existing wood cased soffit to remain. O Existing light Fixture to remain, typical. O Paint existing plaster soffit at opening. at Senora' -Reflected Ceiling Plan Notes: I. -Refer to MEP drawings for lighting, sprinkler's and mechanical work. -r--°"9 Symbol Indicates approximate ceiling height above finish floor (existing and scheduled ceiling finishes). —L -- &/A20 1/A20 both sides exg carps.e_t tile 2/A20 1/A20 Elmhirst Room 5/A20 6/A20 Okenshie lds 302 Kimball -Room! exg L' bctorpoir..._t tlile 302A -loor Plan A -I0 1/8" = I' - 0" 1. 2,/-103 a._6” Okenshields 302 Demolition Plon 1/8" = I' - 0" Plan Notes: 0 Provide wood door-, panels, hardware, and frame, and leaded glass transom above - Set in existing cut stone mullions. -Refer to A-20. Provide carpet tile to match existing adjacent Flooring. Concrete threshold - finish to match adjacent border in Elmhirst Room. 0 Re -Install modified decorative metal railing at stone stairs. -Refer to A-20. Provide wall framing with gypsum board finish from existing finish floor to underside of roof deck. Provide wood base trim and chair rail trim to match adjacent wall and per A-20. Existing banquette seating, wall, and soffit. Provide cased openings per' A-20. Extent of preparation and paint finish to existing gypsum drywall and scheduled gypsum drywall of exposed wall surfaces. Provide wood base trim to match adjacent trim following raised floor platform removals. -Refer to A-20. Seneral Plan Notes: 1. Existing stone stair and limestone mullion and quoin members shall be cleaned as per Specifications. 2. -Refer to reflected ceiling plan for information on ceiling finishes and detailing. Demolition Notes: Elmhirst -Room 303 iRemove entire raised floor construction to expose existing concrete or terrazzo floor. -Remove entire wall construction - Full height and partial height walls. Remove ceiling tile system. Coordinate removals of lighting, mechanical, and sprinkler system components with MEP drawings. -Remove limestone mullions and sill, glazing, masonry wall construction and plaster finish below opening to -5" below existing concrete finish floor. -Refer to A-30 For additional information. -Remove portion of existing wall construction to provide openings. iRefer to sheet A-20. Existing beam wrap construction to remain in place during demolition operations. Refer to 3/A -I0 for additional information. Salvage existing decorative metal railing at stone stairs, and modify for reinstallation. WARNING: DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING THOSE IN ELECTRONIC FORM, PREPARED BY BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC ARE INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE FOR USE SOLELY WITH RESPECT TO THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY WERE CREATED. THE ARCHITECT RETAINS ALL COMMON LAW, STATUTORY AND OTHER RESERVED RIGHTS, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT. FOR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND ELECTRONIC MEDIA. IT ISA VIOLATION OF TITLE VII, PART 69.5(B) OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT TO ALTER THIS DRAWING. IF ALTERED, SUCH ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX HIS SEAL, SIGNATURE, THE DATE, THE NOTATION "ALTERED BY", AND THE SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION. WHERE DRAWINGS, ON PAPER OR ELECTRONIC MEDIA, SHOW EXISTING, NEW, AND/OR PROPOSED WORK AND CONDITIONS, IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT IT IS SO SHOWN AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION AND THAT THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT, WHILE BELIEVING SUCH INFORMATION TO BE SUBSTANTIALLY CORRECT, ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY THEREFORE. THE USER SHALL MAKE THEMSELVES FAMILIAR WITH ALL CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE NATURE AND MANNER OF THEIR WORK INCLUDING VERIFICATION OF ALL DIMENSIONS LOCATING EXISTING, PROPOSED, AND/OR NEW WORK AND CONDITIONS. C ITe CW Engineering..., 128 Hogan Road Fairport, NY 14450 585-223-2462 . ...., . E N G I N R . l Eg StructurangneenConsultants 1053 EAST MAIN STREET ROCIESTER, NEW YORK I 4009 phone: (585) 482-8130 fax: (585) 482-0440 web site: www.jensenbrv.com . - P C date STAMP Cii , ‘,./ ..„ ,Iiii - ),,, ,, I ,, › , ,,, „.,,, „ ,„, ,,, i . . -,...1 - 0 ' 25944 Or NE, r) ....At - * , PROJECT TITLE: Elmhirst -Room - Exit ACCOSS Doorway Willard Straight Hall Ithaca, New York SHEET TITLE: Plans PROJECT NO.: 17[010 COPYRIGHT 2014 ARCHITECTURE PLLC Winthrop Street Rochester, New York 14607 (585) 262-2035 .22 -'32 2 CLIENT/OWNER: OWNER: C, ornell University C,ampus Life, Cornell Dining Ithaca, NY 14E)53 SHEET NUMBER/DATE: A 10 March 24, 2014 0 c New wall construction Okenshields beyond i z ; 2//',//i// Okenshields beyond � Kimball Room - 302A (q� Partial West Elevation 1/4" = 1' - 0" Existing soFFit Wood corner trim t Provide openings - Wood casings to match Open to Okenshields Okenshields - 502 South Elevation 1/4" = 1' - 0" Openings - Wood casings Wood chair rail trim 2 A-50 Corridor beyond Wood corner tri Wood Okenshielcs - 302 Partial East Elevation 1/4" = 1' - 0" Provide openings, including - wood casings Existing Ix trim- ModiFy For removals and trim installation Line of removals ae Wood corner trim to match Line oF existing seating Wood chair rail trim Location of existing removable gypsum board access panel - Following demolition oF floor platForm, continue to provide access to existing chase /// // / /; Line of floor platform and base trim to be removed Existing soffit to remain Wood base / trim <imoa I I Room - 302A South Elevation 1/4" = 1' - 0" 1 Okenshields - 302 North Elevation 1/4" = 1' - 0" Existing banquette seating to remain in place Wood corner trim Following removals, Purr wall out, gpdw, and paint Support bracket and rossette, typ of (3), --Refer to 3a/A 20 Line of floor removals, typ Kimball Room - 302A Partial North Elevation 1/2" =1' 0" Note U3 U Note #2 Existing cake walk stair Kimball Room - 302A i� Partial East Elevation 1/2" = 1' 0" 3 A-20 A-51 NOTES: I. Salvage existing rail assembly; provide modification as scheduled off-site. 2. Provide (3) support brackets and rosettes. 3. Provide rail member to connect existing rail to baluster. 4. Reinstall assembly in same location Following modifications. 5/8" sq wrought iron Verify dimension with existing rail post and Face of existing stone 4-1/2" dia rosette - Match existing Note: Bracket and rosette to match existing - Stair SA - Upper floors Ornamental Railinc Bracket En larges Elevations 1/2" = 1' - 0" Corridor beyond Kimball Room - 302A East Elevation A-20 1/4" = 1' - 0" 3 A-50 Wood corner trim Elmirst Room - 303 kest Elevation 1/4" = 1' - 0" WARNING: DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING THOSE IN ELECTRONIC FORM, PREPARED BY BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC ARE INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE FOR USE SOLELY WITH RESPECT TO THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY WERE CREATED. THE ARCHITECT RETAINS ALL COMMON LAW, STATUTORY AND OTHER RESERVED RIGHTS, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT. FOR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND ELECTRONIC MEDIA, IT ISA VIOLATION OF TITLE VII, PART 69.5(B) OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT TO ALTER THIS DRAWING. IF ALTERED, SUCH ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX HIS SEAL, SIGNATURE, THE DATE, THE NOTATION "ALTERED BY", AND THE SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION. WHERE DRAWINGS, ON PAPER OR ELECTRONIC MEDIA, SHOW EXISTING, NEW, AND/OR PROPOSED WORK AND CONDITIONS, IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT IT IS SO SHOWN AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION AND THAT THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT, WHILE BELIEVING SUCH INFORMATION TO BE SUBSTANTIALLY CORRECT, ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY THEREFORE. THE USER SHALL MAKE THEMSELVES FAMILIAR WITH ALL CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE NATURE AND MANNER OF THEIR WORK INCLUDING VERIFICATION OF ALL DIMENSIONS • yii. CW Engineering 128 Hogan Road Fairport, NY 14450 p 585-223-2462 .,~ �, E N G I N E E R I Structural Engineering Consultants 1 653 EAST MAIN STREET ROCHESTER, NEW YORK phone: (585) 482-8 130 fax: (585) 482-0440' web site: www.Jensenbrv.com ,PLLC 14609 — -__.- STAMP PROJECT TITLE: E lmh Inst Room - Exit AGGsSS Door W ay Willard Straight Hall I Ithaca, Ne W York SHEET TITLE: Interior E levations PROJECT NO.: 14010 COPYRIGHT 2014 .. �, q GAT, �`� v ffiQ ; a '�+ ARCHITECTURE PLL C CLIENT / OWNER: Lorne l l University Campus Life, Cornell Dining p 9 SHEET NUMBER/DATE: _ O 32 Winthrop Street Rochester, New York 14607 (585) 262-2035 LOCATING EXISTING, PROPOSED, AND/OR NEW WORK AND CONDITIONS.o c I thaca, NY 14853 March 24, 2014 6 I I I I A-50 I I I I 11111 III Elmirst Room - 303 kest Elevation 1/4" = 1' - 0" WARNING: DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING THOSE IN ELECTRONIC FORM, PREPARED BY BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC ARE INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE FOR USE SOLELY WITH RESPECT TO THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY WERE CREATED. THE ARCHITECT RETAINS ALL COMMON LAW, STATUTORY AND OTHER RESERVED RIGHTS, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT. FOR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND ELECTRONIC MEDIA, IT ISA VIOLATION OF TITLE VII, PART 69.5(B) OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT TO ALTER THIS DRAWING. IF ALTERED, SUCH ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX HIS SEAL, SIGNATURE, THE DATE, THE NOTATION "ALTERED BY", AND THE SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION. WHERE DRAWINGS, ON PAPER OR ELECTRONIC MEDIA, SHOW EXISTING, NEW, AND/OR PROPOSED WORK AND CONDITIONS, IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT IT IS SO SHOWN AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION AND THAT THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT, WHILE BELIEVING SUCH INFORMATION TO BE SUBSTANTIALLY CORRECT, ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY THEREFORE. THE USER SHALL MAKE THEMSELVES FAMILIAR WITH ALL CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE NATURE AND MANNER OF THEIR WORK INCLUDING VERIFICATION OF ALL DIMENSIONS • yii. CW Engineering 128 Hogan Road Fairport, NY 14450 p 585-223-2462 .,~ �, E N G I N E E R I Structural Engineering Consultants 1 653 EAST MAIN STREET ROCHESTER, NEW YORK phone: (585) 482-8 130 fax: (585) 482-0440' web site: www.Jensenbrv.com ,PLLC 14609 revisions I date BEROAIR STAMP PROJECT TITLE: E lmh Inst Room - Exit AGGsSS Door W ay Willard Straight Hall I Ithaca, Ne W York SHEET TITLE: Interior E levations PROJECT NO.: 14010 COPYRIGHT 2014 .. �, q GAT, �`� v ffiQ ; a '�+ ARCHITECTURE PLL C CLIENT / OWNER: Lorne l l University Campus Life, Cornell Dining p 9 SHEET NUMBER/DATE: _ O 32 Winthrop Street Rochester, New York 14607 (585) 262-2035 LOCATING EXISTING, PROPOSED, AND/OR NEW WORK AND CONDITIONS.o c I thaca, NY 14853 March 24, 2014 STEEL NOTES I.) STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO THE 2011 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISG) SPECIFICATION AND CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE. 2.) STRUCTURAL STEEL GRADES: VI -SECTIONS: ASTM AGg2, Fy = 50ksi ANGLES, PLATES 4 CHANNELS: ASTM A36, Fy = 36ksi STRUCTURAL STEEL TUBING: ASTM A500, Fy = 46ksi STRUCTURAL STEEL PIPE: ASTM A50I, Fy = 36ksi ANCHOR BOLTS: ASTM A301 or ASTM A36 BOLTS: ASTM A301 3.) WELDING SHALL CONFORM TO AWS DI.I. ELECTRODES SHALL BE E1OXX. 4.) STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE SHOP PAINTED WITH AN ALKYD PRIMER PAINT. AFTER COMPLETING ERECTION TOUGH UP ALL AREAS WHERE PAINT 15 MISSING OR DAMAGED, INCLUDING FIELD WELDS, WITH ALKYD PRIMER PAINT. 5.) LIGHT GAGE FRAMING SHALL CONFORM TO THE Ig86 AI51 SPECIFICATION FOR THE DESIGN OF GOLD -FORMED STEEL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. MEMBERS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM YIELD STRESS EQUAL TO 50ksi AND SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM FLANGE WIDTH OF 15/8" AND A RETURN OF /2'. SEE DRAWINGS FOR SIZE AND GAGE. 6.) SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL AND LIGHT GAGE FRAMING TO THE ARCHITECT FOR -REVIEW BEFORE BEGINNING FABRICATION. 1.) GROUT SHALL BE DRY PACK GROUT BY THE EUCLID CHEMICAL COMPANY, OR APPROVED EQUAL, INSTALLED PER MANUFAGTURER'5RECOMMENDATIONS. OW 6 x 15 x 5'-8"± to span between panel points of 28LH13. Clamp in 4 locations to bottom chord Approx location of First botom chord panel point on 28LOq �j Adjustable steel shoring post at each of 1 existing joists - (3)28LOq and (4)28LH13- Bearing plate each end - Attach to W8, and to 1A16 or bottom chord of existing 28L0c1 Loads: at 28L0c1 - 6.1 K at 28LH13 - q.5 K Jack up posts approx 1/16" to relieve load on wall 1 W8 x 31 x 26' - bear above 1 existing 8" x 6.5# JR beams OShim and non - shrink grout Oj 1/2" plywood x 1'-4" continuous on 2 layers of canvas on existing wood Floor Exg 28LH13 Exg 28LOq beyond GONORETE NOTES I.) CONCRETE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 318-08 AND AGI 301-05. 2.) MINIMUM CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AT 28 DAYS SHALL BE 3,000psi. 4.) -REINFORCING STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM Ab15M, A616M, or A611M. 5.) SUBMIT CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS TO THE ARCHITECT FOR -REVIEW BEFORE BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. WOOD NOTES I.) WOOD CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO THE AMERICAN FOREST AND PAPER ASSOCIATION (APPA) 2001 NATIONAL DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS. LUMBER SHALL BE #2 HEM -FIR, UNLE55 OTHERWISE NOTED. LUMBER FOR HEAVY TIMBER SHALL BE #2 HEM -FFR OR BETTER. 2) LVL OR MIGROLLAM LUMBER SHALL BE A5 MANUFACTURED BY WEYERHAEUSER CORPORATION OR APPROVED EQUAL. BEAMS SHALL BE FASTENED TOGETHER WITH A MINIMUM OF (2)ROWS OF SIMPSON SDS I/4X6 AT lb" OG, EACH FACE, INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 3.) PROVIDE SIMPSON QUIK DRIVE TB SCREWS AT 12" OG MAXIMUM TO ATTACH WOOD MEMBERS TO TUBE STEEL (HSS), COUNTERSUNK, TYPICAL. Note on MGIB Installation: 1. Remove existing anchors from existing joist bearing plates. 2. Repair face of existing masonry beyond back of MC18. 3. After installing MG18, reinstall existing masonry, matching original location of stones and mortar joints, up to 4" min above elevation of new ceiling. Above that level, concrete masonry or brick may be used to fill in the gap up to the bottom of the existing masonry above. 4. Attach masonry with Hohmann 4 Barnard (H4 B) 363 -BT flexible gripstay anchors at 6" oc vertically and 12" oc horizontally. Attach anchors to vertical H4 B 360-Gx15", 12 -gage gripstay channels at 12" oc, shop welded to the web of MG IS. 5. Mortar shall match composition, color and texture oF existing mortar unless otherwise noted. Steel shims as necessary- Field weld existing bearing plate to shims and Field weld shims to MG 18 MG 18 x 42.1 Repair top of existing stone. Drypack nonshrink grout between top of existing stone and bottom of MG18 over the length of the bearing area (4" x Remove portion of existing masonry as necessary to install MGIa. Refer to Note above. Align edge of bottom flange with existing mortar joint if possible Elmhirst Room 303 Shorinc Phase I Su000rt Existing Floor Joists 1/2" = 1' - 0" Do This Work First SPECIAL I NSPECT I ONS .) SPECIAL INSPECTIONS SHALL CONFORM TO ChAFTER 1 7 OF ThE SUILDING CODE OF NEW YORK STATE (DCNYS) - 20 I 0 2.)5FECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS INDICATED 0 ThIS SECTION ARE ThE OWNER'S RESPONSIDILITY, OWNER WILL ENGAGE QUALIFIED SPECIAL INSPECTORS AND TESTING AGENCIES TO PERFORM MESE SERVICES. 3.) SPECIAL INSPECTIONS ShALL DE AS INDICATED 0 THE SChEDULE BELOW: SPECIAL INSPECTION FREQUENCY REFERENCED STANDARD STEEL CONSTRUCTION: 13'-0" 4 Bearinc Plate Detail A-30 I-1/2" = I' - O" I' -q" bearing MG18 x 42. clear span Install mortar in the clear span area (4" x q'-6") 00 bxbxb'-0" 4x4x3'-6" 1/2" threaded rod hangers 00 Plate 3x3/8 bx6x3/8x4"+/- attach to existing jamb stone with 2- 3/8x3 Simpson Titen HD heavy-duty screw anchors. Attach through 5/16"x3/4" slotted holes (oriented parallel to the axis of the H55 8x4) with 2- #14x1" self -drilling, selF-tapping screws Existing jamb stone to remain Remove this existing jamb stone before removing existing sill. Gut existing dowels if necessary 1 After removing vertical mullions, install horizontal adjustable steel shoring post between existing jamb stones to be sure the stones remain in place before removing lower jamb stone. 28LH13 28L0c1 28LH13 28L0c1 28LH13 28L0c1 Blocking beyond 00 ""� 11 17.111.1.1171111M-1111111111--------II i -�--_ 1.. _ � 11 III%,��11 11 li I�� 11 ir� III �, nal bamL-� _me_mm ©©. II •Ill �� 111 I!I' I� Fr I 11 MBIIME111I1N i 1� 28 Top of existing joists Bottom, of existing joist bearing plates Shim space as required NN HS5 8x4x5/I6 O 3/161/ 04 00 Existing masonry wall - 'Remove masonry to 4"± below existing finish floor and set plate on non -shrink grout on existing solid masonry HSS 8x2xI/4 column (2) 1/2" dia. x 1"L anchor bolts - embed min 4" into holes drilled into existing solid masonry - Attach to stone with Simpson ET -HP anchoring adhesive Bearing plate: bxlOx3/8- Set on 3/4"± non -shrink grout on existing solid masonry General Note: Protect existing limestone opening units scheduled to remain during Work. GC is responsible for repairing any damage to existing conditions. Notes: O Remove after installing MG18 and shims to joist bearing plates. ORemove after installing HSS Sx2, HSS 8x4, L 6x6, and shims/grout between H55 8x4 and existing vertical mullion. ORemove after installing new jamb stones below existing jamb stones to remain. Shoring For existing stone lintel and mullions which remain in place. Permanent support for lintel and mullion. Clean and repair bottom, of existing stone vertical mullion. Install solid steel shims or nonshrink grout between top of HSS 5x4 and bottom oF existing mullion. O O O (2) beams built-up of (4) I -3/4x11-1/8 LVL x Brace in east -west and north -south directions Steel plate 3x3/8x1' 2" wit 1/2" plywood, brace in east -west and north -south directions, and (2) layers canvas cushioning below bottom of mullion. Remove after permanent supports are in place HSS Sx2 column U Field weld to HS58x4 and to baseplate Wood blocking 03 between jamb stone and horiz jack post Bearing plate U 6x10 on nonshrink grout Existing stone sill Shorinc Phase 2 Elevation 1/2" = 1' - 0" 00 Adjustable steel shoring post at each end of each of two beams - Load = 2.6k each - Bearing plate each end - attach to 6x6 and beam 00 6x6x8'-0" on I/2"xl'-4" plywood on (2) layers canvas on existing wood floor 00 bxbxb'-0"± 00 II Solid wood blocking - shape as cradle- cut to Fit soffit of existing stone lintel - Wedge into place between mullions - (2) locations bxbxb'-O"± each side of wall - Attach to LVL's 00 Existing jamb stone beyond Kimball Room 302A 0(2) HSS 8x2x1/4 columns OBearing pl bxlOx3/8" / i Elmhirst --Room 303 2-I/2".1) U anchor bolts Non shrink grout 00 4x4x3'-6"±- 6 locations (see elevation) - Hang From 6x6 w/ 1/2" thru bolt 1/2" threaded rod hanger- each side existing mullion 00 1/2" steel dowel between existing vertical mullion and H5S 8x4 - Drill 1/I6" hole in each - See Note ® Horizontal adjustable() steel shoring post between jamb stones 2-O"± wall above A-30 Shorinc Phase 2 SuQJort During Steel Tu A-30 I/2" = 1' - 0" Je nstallation WARNING: DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING THOSE IN ELECTRONIC FORM, PREPARED BY BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC ARE INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE FOR USE SOLELY WITH RESPECT TO THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY WERE CREATED. THE ARCHITECT RETAINS ALL COMMON LAW, STATUTORY AND OTHER RESERVED RIGHTS, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT. FOR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND ELECTRONIC MEDIA. IT IS A VIOLATION OF TITLE VII, PART 69.5(B) OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT TO ALTER THIS DRAWING. IF ALTERED, SUCH ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX HIS SEAL, SIGNATURE, THE DATE, THE NOTATION "ALTERED BY", AND THE SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION. WHRK AND ECONDRE RTIONS, TIAWINGS, OSUNDERSTOOD THAN PAPER OR TOITISSOSHOWN NIC MEDIA, OASAW XMATTER OF INFORMATION ING, NEW, PRAODTDATOHE OWNER AND ARCHITECT, WHILE BELIEVING SUCH INFORMATION TO BE SUBSTANTIALLY CORRECT, ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY THEREFORE. THE USER SHALL MAKE THEMSELVES FAMILIAR WITH ALL CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE NATURE AND MANNER OF THEIR WORK INCLUDING VERIFICATION OF ALL DIMENSIONS LOCATING EXISTING, PROPOSED, AND/OR NEW WORK AND CONDITIONS. • ye CW Eng i neeri n 128 Hogan Road Fairport, NY 14450 p 585-223-2462 ENGINEER! ® ..:,:`"„ ► "' Structural Engineering ConsUltant5 1653 EAST MAIN STREET ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14609 phone: (585) 482-81 30 fax: (585) 482-0440,° web site: www. ensenbrv.com 3. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL: ASTM A-6 OR ASTM A-568 a. IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS TO CONFORM TO ASTM STANDARDS SPECIFIED IN ThE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC 32 Winthrop Street Rochester, New York 14607 (585) 262-2035 b. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFIED MILL TEST REPORTS REQUIRED STAMP SD it GAT v. „ „ 'y k •i dfi 4. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF WELD FILLER MATERIALS: SHEET TITLE: Shoring AISC ASD Sec. A3.6 a. IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS TO CONFORM TO AW5 SPECIFICATION 0 ThE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CLIENT / OWNER: Cornell University Campus Life, Cornell Dining P g NY 14853 b. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE REQUIRED March 24, 2014 5. INSPECTION OF WELDING: AW5 D I . I a. STRUCTURAL STEEL: iv. SINGLE -PASS FILLET WELDS < ''0 PERIODIC 6. INSPECTION OF STEEL FRAME JOINT DETAILS FOR COMPLIANCE WITh APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS: PERIODIC BCNYS I 704.3.2 a. MEMBER LOCATIONS b. APPLICATION OF JOINT DETAILS AT EACh CONNECTION 13'-0" 4 Bearinc Plate Detail A-30 I-1/2" = I' - O" I' -q" bearing MG18 x 42. clear span Install mortar in the clear span area (4" x q'-6") 00 bxbxb'-0" 4x4x3'-6" 1/2" threaded rod hangers 00 Plate 3x3/8 bx6x3/8x4"+/- attach to existing jamb stone with 2- 3/8x3 Simpson Titen HD heavy-duty screw anchors. Attach through 5/16"x3/4" slotted holes (oriented parallel to the axis of the H55 8x4) with 2- #14x1" self -drilling, selF-tapping screws Existing jamb stone to remain Remove this existing jamb stone before removing existing sill. Gut existing dowels if necessary 1 After removing vertical mullions, install horizontal adjustable steel shoring post between existing jamb stones to be sure the stones remain in place before removing lower jamb stone. 28LH13 28L0c1 28LH13 28L0c1 28LH13 28L0c1 Blocking beyond 00 ""� 11 17.111.1.1171111M-1111111111--------II i -�--_ 1.. _ � 11 III%,��11 11 li I�� 11 ir� III �, nal bamL-� _me_mm ©©. II •Ill �� 111 I!I' I� Fr I 11 MBIIME111I1N i 1� 28 Top of existing joists Bottom, of existing joist bearing plates Shim space as required NN HS5 8x4x5/I6 O 3/161/ 04 00 Existing masonry wall - 'Remove masonry to 4"± below existing finish floor and set plate on non -shrink grout on existing solid masonry HSS 8x2xI/4 column (2) 1/2" dia. x 1"L anchor bolts - embed min 4" into holes drilled into existing solid masonry - Attach to stone with Simpson ET -HP anchoring adhesive Bearing plate: bxlOx3/8- Set on 3/4"± non -shrink grout on existing solid masonry General Note: Protect existing limestone opening units scheduled to remain during Work. GC is responsible for repairing any damage to existing conditions. Notes: O Remove after installing MG18 and shims to joist bearing plates. ORemove after installing HSS Sx2, HSS 8x4, L 6x6, and shims/grout between H55 8x4 and existing vertical mullion. ORemove after installing new jamb stones below existing jamb stones to remain. Shoring For existing stone lintel and mullions which remain in place. Permanent support for lintel and mullion. Clean and repair bottom, of existing stone vertical mullion. Install solid steel shims or nonshrink grout between top of HSS 5x4 and bottom oF existing mullion. O O O (2) beams built-up of (4) I -3/4x11-1/8 LVL x Brace in east -west and north -south directions Steel plate 3x3/8x1' 2" wit 1/2" plywood, brace in east -west and north -south directions, and (2) layers canvas cushioning below bottom of mullion. Remove after permanent supports are in place HSS Sx2 column U Field weld to HS58x4 and to baseplate Wood blocking 03 between jamb stone and horiz jack post Bearing plate U 6x10 on nonshrink grout Existing stone sill Shorinc Phase 2 Elevation 1/2" = 1' - 0" 00 Adjustable steel shoring post at each end of each of two beams - Load = 2.6k each - Bearing plate each end - attach to 6x6 and beam 00 6x6x8'-0" on I/2"xl'-4" plywood on (2) layers canvas on existing wood floor 00 bxbxb'-0"± 00 II Solid wood blocking - shape as cradle- cut to Fit soffit of existing stone lintel - Wedge into place between mullions - (2) locations bxbxb'-O"± each side of wall - Attach to LVL's 00 Existing jamb stone beyond Kimball Room 302A 0(2) HSS 8x2x1/4 columns OBearing pl bxlOx3/8" / i Elmhirst --Room 303 2-I/2".1) U anchor bolts Non shrink grout 00 4x4x3'-6"±- 6 locations (see elevation) - Hang From 6x6 w/ 1/2" thru bolt 1/2" threaded rod hanger- each side existing mullion 00 1/2" steel dowel between existing vertical mullion and H5S 8x4 - Drill 1/I6" hole in each - See Note ® Horizontal adjustable() steel shoring post between jamb stones 2-O"± wall above A-30 Shorinc Phase 2 SuQJort During Steel Tu A-30 I/2" = 1' - 0" Je nstallation WARNING: DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING THOSE IN ELECTRONIC FORM, PREPARED BY BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC ARE INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE FOR USE SOLELY WITH RESPECT TO THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY WERE CREATED. THE ARCHITECT RETAINS ALL COMMON LAW, STATUTORY AND OTHER RESERVED RIGHTS, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT. FOR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND ELECTRONIC MEDIA. IT IS A VIOLATION OF TITLE VII, PART 69.5(B) OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT TO ALTER THIS DRAWING. IF ALTERED, SUCH ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX HIS SEAL, SIGNATURE, THE DATE, THE NOTATION "ALTERED BY", AND THE SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION. WHRK AND ECONDRE RTIONS, TIAWINGS, OSUNDERSTOOD THAN PAPER OR TOITISSOSHOWN NIC MEDIA, OASAW XMATTER OF INFORMATION ING, NEW, PRAODTDATOHE OWNER AND ARCHITECT, WHILE BELIEVING SUCH INFORMATION TO BE SUBSTANTIALLY CORRECT, ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY THEREFORE. THE USER SHALL MAKE THEMSELVES FAMILIAR WITH ALL CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE NATURE AND MANNER OF THEIR WORK INCLUDING VERIFICATION OF ALL DIMENSIONS LOCATING EXISTING, PROPOSED, AND/OR NEW WORK AND CONDITIONS. • ye CW Eng i neeri n 128 Hogan Road Fairport, NY 14450 p 585-223-2462 ENGINEER! ® ..:,:`"„ ► "' Structural Engineering ConsUltant5 1653 EAST MAIN STREET ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14609 phone: (585) 482-81 30 fax: (585) 482-0440,° web site: www. ensenbrv.com LLC date BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC 32 Winthrop Street Rochester, New York 14607 (585) 262-2035 •.. ,;; STAMP SD it GAT v. „ „ 'y k •i dfi PROJECT TITLE: Elmhirst Room -Exit Access Doorway Willard Straight Hall Ithaca, New York SHEET TITLE: Shoring PROJECT NO.: 14010 COPYRIGHT 2014 Na CLIENT / OWNER: Cornell University Campus Life, Cornell Dining P g NY 14853 SHEET NUMBER/DATE: _� O March 24, 2014 oIthaca, = DI Detail D: Glass Lite Section 3".1'-0" Detail C: Lock. -Rail 3".I'-0" I" 33.. 4 Detail B - Class Lites 3".11-0" 3„ Panel 64 molding Leac to bE and glazi / r 0 Kiico Detail A -Panel-to-Panel 3"=1'-0" // Existing stone hood - Slope gypsum board ofFit to expose hood - Remove exg glazing - Provide leaded glass transom in pattern to match existing transom glass and pattern of existing in Elmhirst-Room Ix3 wood trim - wrap opening Door panel- stile anel- stile and rail Leaded glass rites, typ Elmhirst Room - Enlarged Elevation 1/2°=1'-0" Flat panel Remove existing glazing - Provide leaded glass panels - Install in existing stone mullions to match existing ad acent Existing stone mullions scheduled to remain in place Refer to A-30 for shoring information during removals Enlarged Plan at Transom 1/2"=1'-0” Line of existing finish plaster Ix3 trim to wrap entire masonry opening Wood stile and rail panel, ea side Wood blocking Tube steel column Line of stone mullion transom above Line of transition strip at concrete threshold J Line of carpet tile Note: Doors not shown for clarity Enlarged Plan 1/2"=1'-0" /1,_24„-/ 3.-0„ 3'-O" 1'-2" 4' Kimball Room Enlarged Elevation 1/2°=1'-0" Chamfered corner to match existing Elmhirst door- -ReFer to Detail A, A-50 Lock rail- Cadroon- Convex fluting to match existing Elmirst door- -ReFer to Detail 6, m0 A-50 i-. Provide cut limestone ctuoins to match existing Decorative wrought iron pulls 1 Provide wood cased sofFit to match existing Provide acoustical panel ceiling finish to match existing Okenshie Ids 302 Partition Nall - Nall Section 3/4"=1'-0" L 6" galv metal stud - 0.033" at 24" oc, braced at 48" oc vertical 5/8" gpdw ea side Ix4 wood casing, typical Kimball Room 302a Ix4 chair rail trim I x6 wood base trim Cpdw soffit at stone hood --51 NOTE: Attach wood blocking and trim to HSS tube steel members with Simpson Quik Drive TB screws at 12" oc maximum, countersunk, typical. Acoustical panel ceiling - I- hour rated Existing limestone mullion to remain Existing plaster wall finish and wood grid ceiling to remain- -Refer to 6/A-30 Remove existing glazing - Provide leaded glass panels within existing limestone mullion system Elmhirst Room Existing floor - Provide carpet tile to match w/ metal transition strip- -Refer to A-10 303 Existing plaster wall return- Patch and paint following removals Poured concrete to match existing adjacent concrete border in Elmhirst Room - Bronze transition strip (terrazzo style) -Finish slab to match existing adjacent Existing concrete slob Existing stone masonry wall MasonryO enin Wall Setio g 3/4"=1'-0" Bearing plate at (2) post locations- -Refer to 4/A-30 WARNING: DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING THOSE IN ELECTRONIC FORM, PREPARED BY BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC ARE INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE FOR USE SOLELY WITH RESPECT TO THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY WERE CREATED. THE ARCHITECT RETAINS ALL COMMON LAW, STATUTORY AND OTHER RESERVED RIGHTS, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT. FOR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND ELECTRONIC MEDIA. IT ISA VIOLATION OF TITLE VII, PART 69.5(B) OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OFA LICENSEDa ARCHITECT TO ALTER THIS DRAWING. IF ALTERED, SUCH ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX HIS SEAL, SIGNATURE, THE DATE, THE NOTATION "ALTERED BY", AND THE SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION. WHERE DRAWINGS, ON PAPER OR ELECTRONIC MEDIA, SHOW EXISTING, NEW, AND/OR PROPOSED WORK AND CONDITIONS, IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT IT IS SO SHOWN AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION AND THAT THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT, WHILE BELIEVING SUCH INFORMATION TO BE SUBSTANTIALLY CORRECT, ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY THEREFORE. THE USER SHALL MAKE THEMSELVES FAMILIAR WITH ALL CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE NATURE AND MANNER OF THEIR WORK INCLUDING VERIFICATION OF ALL DIMENSIONS • Te. CW Engineering 128 Hogan Road Fairport, NY 14450 f 585-223-2462 � �- � ;: EG ENGINEERM.,.... Structural Engineering Consultants 1 653 EAST MAIN STREET ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14609 phone: (585) 482-81 30 fax:(585) 482 0440 web site: www.iensenbrv.com �- +1 BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC .T C 1 L L t.J � " STAMP �� a i ' e w® er , tr `� " � �,``" '' °` ` �� ` PROJECT TITLE: Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Willard Straight Hall Ithaca, New York SHEET TITLE: Details PROJECT NO.: L-1010 COPYRIGHT 2014 N CLIENT/OWNER: Cornell I Un fivers i t y Gam us Life, Cornell Dinin��jj .1 SHEET NUMBER/DATE: A — 5 0 32 Winthrop Street Rochester, New York 14607 585 262 2035 LOCATING EXISTING, PROPOSED, AND/OR NEW WORK AND CONDITIONS.o = Ithaca, NY 14853 March 24, 2014 54„+ 5,.+ q'_ -i4"+ Enlarged Plan at Transom 1/2"=1'-0” Line of existing finish plaster Ix3 trim to wrap entire masonry opening Wood stile and rail panel, ea side Wood blocking Tube steel column Line of stone mullion transom above Line of transition strip at concrete threshold J Line of carpet tile Note: Doors not shown for clarity Enlarged Plan 1/2"=1'-0" /1,_24„-/ 3.-0„ 3'-O" 1'-2" 4' Kimball Room Enlarged Elevation 1/2°=1'-0" Chamfered corner to match existing Elmhirst door- -ReFer to Detail A, A-50 Lock rail- Cadroon- Convex fluting to match existing Elmirst door- -ReFer to Detail 6, m0 A-50 i-. Provide cut limestone ctuoins to match existing Decorative wrought iron pulls 1 Provide wood cased sofFit to match existing Provide acoustical panel ceiling finish to match existing Okenshie Ids 302 Partition Nall - Nall Section 3/4"=1'-0" L 6" galv metal stud - 0.033" at 24" oc, braced at 48" oc vertical 5/8" gpdw ea side Ix4 wood casing, typical Kimball Room 302a Ix4 chair rail trim I x6 wood base trim Cpdw soffit at stone hood --51 NOTE: Attach wood blocking and trim to HSS tube steel members with Simpson Quik Drive TB screws at 12" oc maximum, countersunk, typical. Acoustical panel ceiling - I- hour rated Existing limestone mullion to remain Existing plaster wall finish and wood grid ceiling to remain- -Refer to 6/A-30 Remove existing glazing - Provide leaded glass panels within existing limestone mullion system Elmhirst Room Existing floor - Provide carpet tile to match w/ metal transition strip- -Refer to A-10 303 Existing plaster wall return- Patch and paint following removals Poured concrete to match existing adjacent concrete border in Elmhirst Room - Bronze transition strip (terrazzo style) -Finish slab to match existing adjacent Existing concrete slob Existing stone masonry wall MasonryO enin Wall Setio g 3/4"=1'-0" Bearing plate at (2) post locations- -Refer to 4/A-30 WARNING: DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING THOSE IN ELECTRONIC FORM, PREPARED BY BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC ARE INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE FOR USE SOLELY WITH RESPECT TO THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY WERE CREATED. THE ARCHITECT RETAINS ALL COMMON LAW, STATUTORY AND OTHER RESERVED RIGHTS, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT. FOR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND ELECTRONIC MEDIA. IT ISA VIOLATION OF TITLE VII, PART 69.5(B) OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OFA LICENSEDa ARCHITECT TO ALTER THIS DRAWING. IF ALTERED, SUCH ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX HIS SEAL, SIGNATURE, THE DATE, THE NOTATION "ALTERED BY", AND THE SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION. WHERE DRAWINGS, ON PAPER OR ELECTRONIC MEDIA, SHOW EXISTING, NEW, AND/OR PROPOSED WORK AND CONDITIONS, IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT IT IS SO SHOWN AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION AND THAT THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT, WHILE BELIEVING SUCH INFORMATION TO BE SUBSTANTIALLY CORRECT, ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY THEREFORE. THE USER SHALL MAKE THEMSELVES FAMILIAR WITH ALL CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE NATURE AND MANNER OF THEIR WORK INCLUDING VERIFICATION OF ALL DIMENSIONS • Te. CW Engineering 128 Hogan Road Fairport, NY 14450 f 585-223-2462 � �- � ;: EG ENGINEERM.,.... Structural Engineering Consultants 1 653 EAST MAIN STREET ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14609 phone: (585) 482-81 30 fax:(585) 482 0440 web site: www.iensenbrv.com �- date BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC .T C 1 L L t.J � " STAMP �� a i ' e w® er , tr `� " � �,``" '' °` ` �� ` PROJECT TITLE: Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Willard Straight Hall Ithaca, New York SHEET TITLE: Details PROJECT NO.: L-1010 COPYRIGHT 2014 N CLIENT/OWNER: Cornell I Un fivers i t y Gam us Life, Cornell Dinin��jj .1 SHEET NUMBER/DATE: A — 5 0 32 Winthrop Street Rochester, New York 14607 585 262 2035 LOCATING EXISTING, PROPOSED, AND/OR NEW WORK AND CONDITIONS.o = Ithaca, NY 14853 March 24, 2014 Patch existing gpdw at openings Wood casing - I x4 Wood chair rail trim - I x4 Intermediate Jamb Banquette Wall Opening Detail 1-l/2"=1'-0" Metal framing Wood blocking as required Wood casing- Ix4 2x solid blocking Wood casing Ix4 2x blocking (2) 6" gals metal Framing w blocking Existing Framing to remain Existing gpdw sofFit- Patch and paint Wood casing - Ix Wood casing- Ix - Install proud of existing banquette seating Wood blocking as required Modify existing framing for scheduled openings Wood Casings Note: Provide eased edges, typical and transparent shop finish, typical r - Intermediate Jamb Head New Nall Opening Detail 1-1/2"=1'-O" Metal framing Wood blocking as required Wood casing- Ix4 Wood casing- Ix 2x solid blocking Wood casing- Ix4 Wood casing- Ix 5/8" gpdw (2) 6" galv metal framing IN blocking Wood casing - I x4 Wood casing - Ix Wood casing- Ix Wood chair rail trim- Ix4 Wood blocking as required Metal framing Wood Casings Note: Provide eased edges, typical and transparent shop finish, typical Existing wood cased soffit to remain Acoustical eiling panel - Matc existing —Rated 1-1/2" steel channel, anchor to existing trusses Saly wire as support ea location 3-5/8" galv metal framing, and bracing 48" oc Provide blocking for wood panel attachment 3/4" veneer plywood panel, red oak, match existing adjacent in size, and finish Okenshields - 302 Wood Gased Soffit Detail i".1.-0" 2 Existing suspended ceiling Existing Acoustical ceiling panel - Rated 4x4xI6 gage x l' -6"L galv steel angle at 24" oc- Fasten to each of the 3 deck ribs with 2- #8x3/4" screws 1 -5/8x3 -5/8x16 gage galv steel Gee joists at 24" oc, typical 4x8x16 gage gusset plate Existing joist framing, typical Kimball Room - 302o Wood cased Soffit Detail 1"=1'-O" Existing roof structure Existing soffit framing to remain Provide 3/4" veneer plywood panel, red oak, match existing adjacent Existing metal deck and roofing system I -1/4x3 -5/8x16 gage gals continuous steel structural track- Fasten to masonry with Simpson 3/Sx3 Titen HD heavy-duty screw anchors at 12" oc - Fasten track to joist with #8x3/4 screws top and bottom Fasten each connection with 4- #8x3/4" self -drilling, self -tapping screws, typical Rated acoustical ceiling panel system (2) layers 5/8' type "x" gpdw (I) layer 5/8" type "x" gpdw Kimball Room - 302o Soffit Detail I"=1' -O" Infill with masonry above exposed wall at sofFit Re -build bluestone to match existing at exposed wall Existing stone hood - Glean Spdw soffit beyond WARNING: DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING THOSE IN ELECTRONIC FORM, PREPARED BY BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC ARE INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE FOR USE SOLELY WITH RESPECT TO THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY WERE CREATED. THE ARCHITECT RETAINS ALL COMMON LAW, STATUTORY AND OTHER RESERVED RIGHTS, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT. FOR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND ELECTRONIC MEDIA. IT ISA VIOLATION OF TITLE VII, PART 69.5(B) OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OFA LICENSED ARCHITECT TO ALTER THIS DRAWING. IF ALTERED, SUCH ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX HIS SEAL, SIGNATURE, THE DATE, THE NOTATION "ALTERED BY", AND THE SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION. WHERE DRAWINGS, ON PAPER OR ELECTRONIC MEDIA, SHOW EXISTING, NEW, AND/OR PROPOSED WORK AND CONDITIONS, IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT IT IS SO SHOWN AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION AND THAT THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT, WHILE BELIEVING SUCH INFORMATION TO BE SUBSTANTIALLY CORRECT, ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY THEREFORE. THE USER SHALL MAKE THEMSELVES FAMILIAR WITH ALL CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE NATURE AND MANNER OF THEIR WORK INCLUDING VERIFICATION OF ALL DIMENSIONS LOCATING EXISTING, PROPOSED, AND/OR NEW WORK AND CONDITIONS.o • Te CW Engineering 128 Hogan Road Fairport, NY 1445032 f 585-223-2462 ....... � �� ( ( Structural Engineering Consultants g g 1653 EAST MAIN STREET ROCHESTER, NEW YORK phone: (585) 482-8130 fax: (585) 482-0440" web site: www.iensenbrv.com o 14609 �- �- date BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC Winthrop Street Rochester, New York 14607 (585) 262-2035 RTAMP ," e y Cir, � �� " r s. " '"� ' «. ; PROJECT TITLE: E: IYYt%1 first -Room - Exit Access Doorway Willard Straight Hall Ithaca, New Yoram SHEET TITLE: Details PROJECT NO.: 1-1010 COPYRIGHT 2014 N ° N = CLIENT / OWNER: Cornell l Un ivers i t y Gam us Life, Lorne I I D in Dining h J Ithaca, NY 14853 SHEET NUMBER/DATE: A_5 1 March 24, 2014 1 o - J O REMOVE EXISTING SPRINKLER REMOVE EXISTING SPF Li_ Li INKLER DARTIA_ T 1/4- = IRD F 00R A\ =V OVALS S EXISTING 0 - EXISTING FP NECT TO EXISTING) EXISTING L E EXISTING FP (SPRINKLER PIIE) LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. CTE EXISTING F CTE CTE L CTE 0 z cn 1- X W CTE CTE PENDANT CEILING SPRINKLER TYPICAL DAR- AL THIRD FLOOR RLA\ DROPOS 1/4" = SPRINKLER NFPA 13 LIGHT HAZARD D PROVIDE SPRINKLERS FOR THE AREA BASED ON THE NEW FLOOR PLAN AND CEILING. CONNECT TO THE EXISTING PIPING. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE SYSTEM AND PIPING REQUIRED. 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE WORKING DRAWINGS. DRAWINGS TO MEET NFPA 13 DEFINITION OF WORKING DRAWINGS FOR SUBMISSION TO THE AHJ. THE SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE CERTIFIED BY THE CONTRACTOR AS REQUIRED BY THE AHJ. UTILIZE AVAILABLE INFORMATION ON THE EXISTING SYSTEM. 2. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES. PROVIDE PIPING AND SPRINKLERS TO AVOID BUILDING COMPONENTS. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL SPRINKLERS TO COVER AROUND OBSTRUCTIONS. REFER TO ALL THE BUILDING DRAWINGS. 3. PROVIDE 1" CONNECTIONS WITH RETURN BENDS TO SPRINKLER HEADS. 4. ALL COMPONENTS SHALL BE UL LISTED AND FM APPROVED. INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH CODES AND WITH NFPA AND FM STANDARDS. SPRINKLERS PENDENT SEMI -RECESSED, MATCH EXISTING (RATING AND RESPONSE). WARNING: DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING THOSE IN ELECTRONIC FORM, PREPARED BY BERG ARCHITECTURE PLLC ARE INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE FOR USE SOLELY WITH RESPECT TO THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY WERE CREATED. THE ARCHITECT RETAINS ALL COMMON LAW, STATUTORY AND OTHER RESERVED RIGHTS, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT. revisions date n C^ Zi �-r 5 • CD • � C 11 0 D N O 11 ` O STAMP E PROJECT TITLE: EI m h i r5t Room -Exit �.cce5s i7oorl uay "Ward lard �.�tralght Hall SHEET TITLE: FIRE PROTECTION FLOOR PLANS PROJECT NO.: 14010 COPYRIGHT 2014 j j „ FOR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND ELECTRONIC MEDIA. IT IS A VIOLATION OF TITLE VII, PART 69.5(8) OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT TO ALTER THIS DRAWING. IF ALTERED, SUCH ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX HIS SEAL, SIGNATURE, THE DATE, THE NOTATION "ALTERED BY", AND THE SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION. WHERE DRAWINGS, ON PAPER OR ELECTRONIC MEDIA, SHOW EXISTING, NEW, AND/OR PROPOSED WORK AND CONDITIONS, IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT IT IS SO SHOWN AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION AND THAT THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT, WHILE BELIEVING SUCH INFORMATION TO BE SUBSTANTIALLY CORRECT, ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY THEREFORE THE USER SHALL MAKE THEMSELVES FAMILIAR WITH ALL CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE NATURE AND MANNER OF THEIR WORK INCLUDING VERIFICATION OF ALL DIMENSIONS CW Engineering 128 Hogan Road Fairport, NY 14450 585-223-2462 0 Structural Engmeering Consultants 1053 EAST MAIN STREET ROCHESTER, NEW YORK phone: (585) 482-8 130 fax: (585) 482 0440 web site: www.jensenbrv.com 14009 �— �.- y ! r�. 11 T QC ` ! . ` Ithaca, New York CLIENT / OWNER: Cornell University y Office of the Dean of Students SHEET NUMBER/DATE: i:_ 1 1 LOCATING EXISTING, PROPOSED, AND/OR NEW WORK AND CONDITIONS. / "` Ithaca, NY 14555 March 24, 2014 J REMOVE EXISTING DIFFUSER AND CONNECT BRANCH DUCT. PATCH MAIN DUCT. I 1— �A�TIA_ T 1/4- = IRD F 00� A\ =V OVALS WORK WITH THE GC ALL AREA EXISTING AIR DIFFUSERS AND DURING DEMOLITION DUST CONTROL. TO COVER SUPPLY AND RETURN GRILLES FOR EXISTING SUPPLY DUCT O CONNECT TO EXISTING DUCT. L TO 3 LINEAR DIFFUSERS EXISTING TO 3 LINEAR DIFFUSERS VOLUME DAMPER SUPPLY DUCT 8"D-1 150CFM DAR- AL THIRD FLOOR 1/4- = 1'-O" NOTES - HVAC LA\ DROPOS D 1. INSULATE UNLINED SUPPLY AIR DUCT. INSULATE ALL NEW SUPPLY DUCT. PATCH EXISTING INSULATION ON SUPPLY DUCT AT REMOVALS. 2. BALANCE AIR SYSTEMS (BALANCE NEW DIFFUSER AND MEASURE AIR FLOW ON EXISTING DIFFUSERS ON SAME ZONE. SUBMIT BALANCE REPORTS TO THE ENGINEER. 3. PROVIDE AND INSTALL EQUIPMENT AND DUCT IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEW YORK STATE ENERGY CODE AND MECHANICAL CODE. 4. INSTALL ALL EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES D-1 DIFFUSER - 24X24 LAY -IN PERFORATED 4 -WAY FIRE RATED, KRUEGER 6600FR DUCTWORK DUCTWORK SHALL BE GALVANIZED STEEL CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA 1" PRESSURE CLASS AND C SEAL CLASS. IN ADDITION ALL SEAMS AND JOINTS SHALL BE SEALED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ENERGY CODE. ROUND DUCT SHALL BE SPIRAL. PROVIDE RADIUS DUCT ELBOWS. IF USED, PROVIDE TURNING VANES IN ALL MITERED ELBOWS. PROVIDE A VOLUME DAMPER IN EACH BRANCH TO DIFFUSERS. ALL DUCT BRANCHES SHALL BE 45 DEG. TAP TYPE. BRANCHES TO DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES SHALL BE THE SIZE OF THE DIFFUSER NECK UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FLEX DUCT CONNECTIONS FOR CONNECTIONS TO DIFFUSERS IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS SHALL BE LINED & INSULATED AND MAXIMUM 6 FEET. WARNING: DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING THOSE IN ELECTRONIC FORM, PREPARED BY BERO ARCHITECTURE PLLC ARE INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE FOR USE SOLELY WITH RESPECT TO THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY WERE CREATED. THE ARCHITECT RETAINS ALL COMMON LAW, STATUTORY AND OTHER RESERVED RIGHTS, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT. FOR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND ELECTRONIC MEDIA. IT IS A VIOLATION OF TITLE VII, PART 69.5(8) OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSED ARCHITECT TO ALTER THIS DRAWING. IF ALTERED, SUCH ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX HIS SEAL, SIGNATURE, THE DATE, THE NOTATION "ALTERED BY", AND THE SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION. WHERE DRAWINGS, ON PAPER OR ELECTRONIC MEDIA, SHOW EXISTING, NEW, AND/OR PROPOSED WORK AND CONDITIONS, IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT IT IS SO SHOWN AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION AND THAT THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT, WHILE BELIEVING SUCH INFORMATION SUBSTANTIALLY CORRECT, ASSUME NO ES FAMILIAR WITH ALL CONDITIONS RESPONSIBILITY THEREFORE. THE USER SHALL MAKE THEMSELVES AFFECTING THE NATURE AND MANNER OF THEIR WORK INCLUDING VERIFICATION OF ALL DIMENSIONS LOCATING EXISTING, PROPOSED, AND/OR NEW WORK AND CONDITIONS.(585) �- �.- date B I RO �-1 ARCHITECTURE PLLC 32 Winthrop Street Rochester, New York 14607 262-2035 ? ' STAMP ` PROJECT TITLE: EI m h i rst Room Exit Access Doorway Willard Straight Hall Ithaca, New York SHEET TITLE: FLOORMSCI IANICAPLANS L PROJECT NO.: 14010 COPYRIGHT 2014 /Ye j CW Engineering 128 Hogan Road Fairport, NY 14450 585-223-2462 ENGINEER1 Structural Eng neerin0 Consultants 1653 EAST MAIN STREET ROCHESTER, NEW YORK phone: (585) 482-8 130 fax: (585) 482-0440 web site: www.jensenbrv.comrf' 14009 revisions - , r CLIENT /OWNER: Gorse I I University Office of the Dean of Students Ithaca, NY 14853 SHEET NUMBER/DATE: I\il 11 March 24, 2014 a SYMBOLS - ELECTRICAL 00 EX DUPLEX RECEPTACLE QUAD RECEPTACLE RECEPTACLE - COUNTER (44", GFI IF NEAR SINK) RECEPTACLE - TOILET ROOM (44", GFI) RECEPTACLE - EXTERIOR (WEATHERPROOF, GFI) 717 HOME RUN CIRCUIT GFI RECEPTACLE - GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTING H DISCONNECT (SAFETY SWITCH) CONTROLLER SWITCH t3 SWITCH - 3 WAY SWITCH - DIMMER OCCUPANCY SENSOR (CEILING) OCCUPANCY SENSOR RELAY I P PJ E ❑F I D Df EXISTING DEVICE SMOKE DETECTOR HEAT DETECTOR FIRE ALARM PULL STATION FIRE ALARM AUDIO/VISUAL DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR FIRE ALARM VISUAL (STROBE) J 0 o\ REWIRE DEVICES IF REQUIRED BY WALL REMOVAL. REMOVE DEVICE BOXES AND ANY WIRING IN WALLS WITH WILL BE REMOVED. 0 REMOVE DOWNLIGHTS THIS ROOM. EXIT SIGN TO REMAIN 0 0 RELOCATE SMOKE DETECTOR TO THE NEW CEILING. 0 0 �A�TIA_ T 1/4" = IRD F 00� A\ =V OVALS L CH- -IX = SCH=D,LI FIXTURE DESCRIPTION LAMP MODEL FA FLUOR. 8" DOWN LIGHT, DIMMING (1) 32TRT LITHONIA AF AR (a) (b) FB FLUOR. 6" DOWM LIGHT, DIMMING (1) 32TRT LITHONIA LP6F 602 (a) (c) PROJECT NO.: 14010 COPYRIGHT 2014 j j Ye CW Engineering 128 Hogan Road Fairport, NY 14450 585-223-2462 �, r ►ti. r I 0 Structural Engmeering Consultants 1053 EAST MAIN STREET ROCHESTER, NEW YORK phone: (585) 482-8 130 fax: (585) 482-0440 web site: wwwjensenbrv.com 14009 revisions CLIENT / OWNER: Gornall University y Office of the Dean of Students Ithaca, NY 14555 SHEET NUMBER/DATE: E.1 1 March 24, 2014 01 EXIT SIGN WITH BATTERY SIMKAR SLEDBRW-SD FLUORESCENT - ELECTRONIC BALLAST 120V UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED (a) PROVIDE UL 263 FIRE RATED ENCLOSURE (b) WHERE MARKED EM PROVIDE EMERGENCY BAI I ERY BALLAST WITH SEPARATE CIRCUIT. (c) IT IS INTENDED THAT THE FIXTURE MATCH THE EXISTING ADJACENT FIXTURES. VERIFY PRIOR TO ORDERING. REMOVALS - ELECTRICAL CONNECT TO EXISTING SWITC CIRCUIT SERVING EXISTING DOWNLIGHT. ED E 0 F �E E FB FB CONNECT TO EXISTING RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT. CONNECT TO ONE OF THE EXISTING ERCUITS THAT SERVED 1fHIS ROOM. DAR- AL THIRD FLOOR FA FA D LA\ DROPOS D 1/4" = 1'-0" 1. "REMOVE" TO INCLUDE DISCONNECT AND REMOVE THE DEVICE AND EXISTING CIRCUIT (EXCEPT WHERE THE ITEM WILL BE REPLACED). 2. "DISCONNECT" TO INCLUDE DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING CIRCUIT (EXCEPT WHERE THE ITEM WILL BE REPLACED). 3. WALL REMOVAL - REMOVE WIRING IN EXISTING WALLS WHICH WILL BE DEMOLISHED. RELOCATE AND EXTEND ANY EXISTING CIRCUITS TO REMAIN. 4. AT REMOVALS REPAIR WALL AND CEILING SURFACES TO MATCH THE ADJACENT SURFACE. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COORDINATE WITH EXISTING SIMPLEX BUILDING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. PROVIDE DEVICES AS SHOWN. CONNECT TO THE BUILDING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. PROVIDE WIRING AND ACCESSORIES REQUIRED. INSTALL DEVICES IN ACCORDANCE WITH ADA AND STATE ACCESSIBILITY CODES. IF REQUIRED BY THE AHJ PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS THAT INCLUDE WIRING DIAGRAMS, MANUFACTURER'S MODEL NUMBERS AND LISTING INFORMATION, BATTERY CALCULATIONS, VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS, AND CONDUCTOR TYPES AND SIZES. IF REQUIRED BY THE AHJ CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COMPLETE SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION AS REQUIRED BY THE AHJ. CERTIFICATION (PE STAMP OR OTHERWISE) OF THE SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR NOTES - ELECTRICAL CONNECT TO EXISTING EXIT SIGN CIRCUIT IN THIS ROOM. MOUNT WITH TOP EVEN WITH BOTTOM OF THE WOOD GRID CEILING. 1. CIRCUITS - UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, PROVIDE 2 #12 AWG WITH #12 GROUND TO A 20A, 1P (POLE) CIRCUIT BREAKER. 2. PROVIDE COMPLETE CIRCUITS AS SHOWN OR AS NUMBERED. 3. INSTALL ALL CONDUIT AND CABLE CONCEALED. 4. PROVIDE LISTED FIRE STOP SEALANT/SYSTEM AT CABLE AND CONDUIT PENETRATION OF FIRE WALLS, PARTITIONS, AND CEILING ASSEMBLIES. 5. DO NOT COMBINE NEUTRALS. 6. MOUNT SWITCHES 42 INCHES ABOVE FLOOR, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. MOUNT RECEPTACLES VERTICALLY AT 18 INCHES ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. WARNING: DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING THOSE IN ELECTRONIC FORM, PREPARED BY BERG ARCHITECTURE PLLC ARE INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE FOR USE SOLELY WITH RESPECT TO THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY WERE CREATED. THE ARCHITECT RETAINS ALL COMMON LAW, STATUTORY AND OTHER RESERVED RIGHTS, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT. FOR ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND ELECTRONIC MEDIA. IT ISA VIOLATION OF TITLE VII, PART 69.5(B) OF THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION LAW FOR ANY PERSON, UNLESS ACTING UNDER THE DIRECTION OF A LICENSEDb ARCHITECT TO ALTER THIS DRAWING. IF ALTERED, SUCH ARCHITECT SHALL AFFIX HIS SEAL, SIGNATURE, THE DATE, THE NOTATION "ALTERED BY", AND THE SPECIFIC DESCRIPTION OF THE ALTERATION. WHERE DRAWINGS, ON PAPER OR ELECTRONIC MEDIA, SHOW EXISTING, NEW, AND/OR PROPOSED WORK AND CONDITIONS, IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT IT IS SO SHOWN AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION AND THAT THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT, WHILE BELIEVING SUCH INFORMATION TO BE SUBSTANTIALLY CORRECT, ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY THEREFORE. THE USER SHALL MAKE THEMSELVES FAMILIAR WITH ALL CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE NATURE AND MANNER OF THEIR WORK INCLUDING VERIFICATION OF ALL DIMENSIONS LOCATING EXISTING, PROPOSED, AND/OR NEW WORK AND CONDITIONS. �- �- date I ROEI ARCHITECTURE PLLC 32 Winthrop treet Rochester, New York 14607 (585)262 2035 f' y ri "' STAMP 11 LAG ` ! ' PROJECT TITLE: Yn h I rst Room - EX It Access Doorwa y Willard Straight Hall g Ithaca, New York SHEET TITLE: FLOOR PLANS PROJECT NO.: 14010 COPYRIGHT 2014 j j Ye CW Engineering 128 Hogan Road Fairport, NY 14450 585-223-2462 �, r ►ti. r I 0 Structural Engmeering Consultants 1053 EAST MAIN STREET ROCHESTER, NEW YORK phone: (585) 482-8 130 fax: (585) 482-0440 web site: wwwjensenbrv.com 14009 revisions CLIENT / OWNER: Gornall University y Office of the Dean of Students Ithaca, NY 14555 SHEET NUMBER/DATE: E.1 1 March 24, 2014 WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY Project Manual & Specifications March 24, 2014 Owner Cornell University Ithaca, NY 14850 Architect Bero Architecture PLLC 32 Winthrop Street Rochester, New York 14607 Willard Straight Hall TABLE OF CONTENTS Elmhirst Room Exit Access Doorway Instructions to Bidders Bid Form General Conditions and Exhibits Exhibit A Change Order Exhibit A-1 Exhibit B Exhibit C Exhibit D Exhibit E Exhibit F — Form I Exhibit F — Form II Exhibit F — Form III Exhibit F — Form IV Exhibit G Exhibit H Exhibit I Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary Schedule of Values for Contractor Payments Final Release Application and Certificate for Payment Guarantee Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan Use of MBE/WBE Vendors Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan Summary of Bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and Vendors Affirmative Action Workforce Report Minority — Women Utilization Report Labor Rate Breakdown Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation Contractor Performance Evaluation DIVISION l - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Section 01 21 00 Section 01 25 00 Section 01 31 19 Section 01 32 16 Section 01 32 33 Section 01 33 00 Section 01 35 29 Section 01 35 43 Section 01 35 44 Section 01 41 00 Section 01 45 00 Section 01 45 29 Section 01 50 00 Section 01 51 00 Section 01 66 00 Section 01 73 29 Section 01 77 00 Section 01 78 23 Section 01 78 36 Section 01 78 39 Summary of the Work Allowances Substitutions and Product Options Project Meetings Construction Schedules Photographic Documentation Submittal Procedures General Health & Safety Requirements General Environmental Requirements Spill Control Regulatory Requirements Quality Control Testing Laboratory Services Temporary Facilities and Controls Temporary Utilities Storage and Protection Cutting, Patching and Repairing Project Close Out Operating and Maintenance Data Warranties and Bonds Record Documents Page 1 Willard Straight Hall Elmhirst Room Exit Access Doorway DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Section 04 01 40 Stone Masonry Restoration DIVISION 5 - METALS Section 05 91 00 Historic Treatment of Ornamental Metal DIVISION 6 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES Section 06 10 53 Section 06 42 14 Section 06 46 00 Section 06 48 00 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Stile and Rail Wood Paneling Wood Trim Wood Frames DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS Section 08 14 33 Stile and Rail Wood Doors Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware Section 08 80 00 Glazing DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 09 22 16 Section 09 29 00 Section 09 51 13 Section 09 68 13 Section 09 91 23 Non-structural Metal Framing Gypsum Board Acoustical Panel Ceilings Tile Carpeting Interior Painting DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 21 10 00 Fire Protection DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 23 00 00 General Provisions for HVAC Work (Mechanical) Section 23 07 13 Duct Insulation Section 23 31 00 Ductwork DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 00 00 Section 26 05 19 Section 26 05 29 Section 26 05 33 Section 26 05 34 Section 26 05 80 Section 26 27 26 General Provisions for Electrical Work Wire and Cable Supporting Devices Raceways, Fittings, and Accessories Device and Junction Boxes Through -Penetration Firestopping for Electrical Work Wiring Devices TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 Willard Straight Hall TABLE OF CONTENTS Elmhirst Room Exit Access Doorway Page 3 DRAWING LIST T-10 Title Sheet CS -10 Key Plan and Code Study A-10 Floor Plans A-20 Interior Elevations A-30 Shoring A-31 Sections A-50 Details A-51 Details F-11 Fire Protection Floor Plans M-11 Mechanical Floor Plans E-11 Electrical Floor Plans END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Project: Owner: Architect: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Willard Straight Hall Elmhirst Room Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Bero Architecture PLLC 32 Winthrop Street Rochester, New York 14607 1. PROPOSAL FORMS a. Proposals shall be made only on the forms provided and all blank and underlined spaces in the forms shall be fully filled in, in ink or typed; amount shall be fully stated both in writing and in figures. Proposals shall be signed by Principals or Officers duly authorized to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificate included in the Bid Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name must be fully stated. Completed form shall be without interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed and dated by the signer. RECAPITULATION OR PROPOSAL a. Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, telegraphic or telephonic proposals or modifications will be considered. 3. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Proposals shall be prepared and enclosed in a sealed envelope. Envelope shall be addressed to: Nancy A. Phelps, Director Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Proposal for: Willard Straight Hall Elmhirst Room Exit Access Doorway Submitted by: (Bidder) b. Proposals shall be delivered to the Owner at the address listed above not later than 2:00 PM on May 2, 2014. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS -1 4. BIDOPENING a. Proposals will be opened publicly by the Owner in Room 133, Humphreys Service Building, Cornell University Campus, Ithaca, New York, at the hour and date listed in 3b. The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any time prior to the date and time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto. 5. BIDDING DOCUMENTS a. The Bidding Documents will consist of the following: (1) Instructions to Bidders. (2) Bid Form. (3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - "General Requirements". (4) Drawings and Specifications. (5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals. 6. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED a. Contract Documents may be obtained from the Facilities Contracts website (htt)://frnance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm ). For assistance call 607-255-5343. b. Additional sets will be available at $40.00 per set without refund. All subcontractors and suppliers requiring may order these at $40.00 per set without refund. No partial sets will be issued. The Contract Documents remain the property of the Owner. c. The successful bidder will be allowed ten (10) sets of drawings and specifications. 7. START OF WORK a. Work at the site shall be started on June 9, 2014 and shall be completed no later than August 15, 2014. 8. BONDS a. Performance and Payment Bonds. The successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds", each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price. The cost of such bonds shall be included in the Bidders Proposal. Each of these Bonds are to be in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve. b. Bid Bond. Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond in the amount of 10% of the Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include a statement that the Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 8a above. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS -2 9. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with one General Contractor for the entire project. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be provided in accordance with the Contract. b. The competence and responsibility of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award. c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities in Bidding. d. All Proposals shall remain in force and effect for a period of not less than sixty (60) calendar days following the bid opening date. e. The Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract. 10. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Each Bidder shall visit the Site of the proposed work, fully acquaint and familiarize himself with the conditions as they exist and the character of the operations to be carried on under the proposed Contract, and make such investigation as he may see fit so that he shall frilly understand the facilities, physical conditions and restrictions attending the work under the Contract. b. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and become familiar with the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents. c. By submitting a Proposal, the Bidder convenants and affirms that he has carefully examined the Drawings, Specifications, associated Bid Documents, the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, and the Site, that he relies on no representation by the Owner, and that from his own investigation he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance, and that as a result of such examination and investigation, he fully understands the conditions of bidding and that he will not make any claim for, and waives any right to damage because of misinterpretation or misunderstanding of the Bid Documents and the conditions of bidding. 11. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall at once notify the Architect, who will send written instructions to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing, addressed to the Architect. Inquiries received seven (7) or more days prior to date fixed for opening of Bids will be given consideration. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS -3 12. PRE-BID CONFERENCE a. A pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 10:00 AM, April 17, 2014, in Room 133 of the Humphreys Service Building. The purpose of the conference will be to clarify the intent of the Contract Documents if necessary. Results will be published in an Addendum. 13. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS a. Each portion of the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder to himself unless he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved individually. b. In the spaces provided in the Bid Fonn, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he proposes to perform directly with his own forces. c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Proposal. d. In the Bid Form, there has been listed the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for which such a listing is required, together with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and approval of principal subcontractors. 14. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested. They will be listed in the Bid Fonn and all Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception, in the spaces provided. b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. 15. UNIT PRICES a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested. They will be listed in the Bid Form and all Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception, in the spaces provided. b. Unit Prices shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection therewith. 16. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. A partial "Schedule of Values" for certain trades and/or subdivisions of the work is required as part of the Bidder's Proposal in the Bid Fonn. b. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete "Schedule of Values" showing the amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract. If requested by the Owner or Architect, the complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS -4 17. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS a. Addenda and/or bulletins issued during the bidding period shall be acknowledged in the space provided in the Bid Form. 18. SUBSTITUTIONS a. Proposals shall conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of work, or method of construction set forth in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, by listing the proposed substitutions and the amounts to be deducted from the Base Bid corresponding to each such proposed substitution in the spaces provided in the Bid Form. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference. 19. SUB -SURFACE CONDITIONS a. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub -surface conditions and similar information given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other sub -surface conditions to be encountered during the work and no guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended. b. Each Bidder shall, by careful examination, inform himself as to the nature and location of the work, the conformation of the ground, subsoil and ground water conditions, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this Contract. The Bidder may, at his option, conduct tests at his expense, including borings, by prior notification to the Owner. Each Bidder shall make his own deductions of sub -surface conditions which may affect methods or cost of construction of the work hereunder and he agrees that, if awarded the construction contract, he will make no claim for damages or other compensation, except such as are provided for in the Contract Documents, should he encounter conditions during the progress of the work different from those as calculated and/or anticipated by him. 20. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes. 21. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes. 22. TAX EXEMPT STATUS a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals or quotations. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS -5 23. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor with respect to such tax exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 24. REQUIRED SUBMISSIONS a. Provide with Bid Proposal: (1) Acknowledgement of Addenda and/or Bulletins issued prior to bid opening (2) Certificate as to Corporate Bidder (3) List of Proposed Subcontractors (4) Schedule of Values (5) Alternate Proposals and Unit Prices b. Within fourteen days after bid opening: (1) Use of Minority and Female Vendor Forms (2) Summary of Bid Activity with Minority and Female Subcontractors/Vendors (3) Six -Month Workforce Projection c. Execution of Contract: Insurance Certificate Performance Bond Labor and Material Payment Bond Schedule of Work (bar chart) Federal Tax Identification Number END OF SECTION INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS -6 WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY Cornell University, Ithaca, New York BID FORM Submitted by: Date To: Nancy A. Phelps, Director Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Gentlemen: The undersigned, a (Name of Bidder) (Type of Firm, State of Incorporation, if applicable) of (Address) having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General, Division 1 - "General Requirements"), and the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated March 24, 2014 prepared by Bero Architecture PLLC., 32 Winthrop Street, Rochester, New York 14607 as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents for the following considerations: 1. BASE BID a. All work complete, for the sum of for MATERIALS, SUPPLIES, LABOR, and SERVICES AND ALL OTHER COSTS. BID FORM BF -1 2. ALTERNATE PROPOSAL a. The undersigned, if awarded the Contract, proposes to perforin work in addition to or in place of the scope of the work shown and specified herein as associated with the Base Bid in accordance with the following Alternate Proposals, which amounts are to be added or deducted to the amount of the Base Bid as indicated for the Alternates specified in Division 1 of the Specifications. b. If the Bidder desires to indicate that the acceptance of any Alternate or Alternates will result neither in an addition to nor a deduction from the value of the work, he shall enter the phrase "No Change" in response to such Alternate or Alternates. c. It is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the following Alternate Proposals within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract. Alternate No. Description None. BID FORM BF -2 3. START OF WORK AND TIME FOR COMPLETION a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence work at the site on June 9, 2014 and to complete the project no later than August 15, 2014. 4. LIST OF PROPOSED PRINCIPAL SUBCONTRACTORS a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the following list for the Sections or Subdivisions of work stated below subject to the following provisions: (1) Prior to the award of the Contract, the Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors", and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. b. Bidder shall list the names of at least one subcontractor for each Section or Subdivision of the work listed below and shall limit the listing for each such Section or Subdivision to THREE (3) names. c. If Bidder does not propose to employ a Subcontractor for any Section or Subdivision of the work listed below, he shall enter the name of his firm for each such Section or Subdivision. MASONRY METALS WOOD, PLASTICS, and COMPOSITES OPENINGS BID FORM BF -3 FINISHES FIRE SUPPRESSION HEATING, VENTILATING, and AIR CONDITIONING ELECTRICAL BID FORM BF -4 5. PRINCIPAL SUBDIVISIONS OR ELEMENTS OF THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S FORCES a. If awarded a Contract, we will perforin the following portions of the Work with forces directly employed by the undersigned: 6. TIME PROGRESS SCHEDULE a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Time Progress Schedule" showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional information related thereto as may reasonably be required. 7. BONDS a. Performance and Payment Bonds. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract to execute and deliver to the Owner "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such form as acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. Such bonds will be furnished by b. Bond Premium Rate (Name of Surety) c. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of $ Amount) is attached to this Bid. 8. SCHEDULE OF VALUES (10% of Bid a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values" including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions of the work, aggregating the total Contract Sum. b. To facilitate the evaluation of Bids, the undersigned has included in each part of his Bid the following values for the trades and/or subdivisions of the work as listed below. Values for work included under Alternate Proposals are excluded. Values relative to General Contractor's costs for General Conditions are excluded. BID FORM BF -5 Spec in Base Bid Section Trades and/or Subdivision Labor Material Division 1 General Requirements Division 2 Masonry & Concrete Demolition Balance of Selective Demolition Division 4 Masonry Division 5 Metals 06 42 14 Stile and Rail Wood Paneling 06 48 00 Wood Frames Division 6 Balance of Wood, Plastics and Composites 08 14 33 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing Division 9 Finishes Division 21 Fire Suppression Division 23 Heating., Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Division 26 Electrical Drawings Shoring Structural Steel Concrete Allowance No. 1 $ Total Total Combined Bid $ BID FORM BF -6 9. SUBSTITUTIONS a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications without substitutions. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, by listing in the space below the proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted. c. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution. d. The sum stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications. Item and Specification Description of Reference Deduction from Base Bid Substitution Section & Page No. Labor Material BID FORM BF -7 10. ACCEPTANCE a. The undersigned agrees that this Proposal shall remain in force and effect for a period of not less than sixty (60) calendar days following the bid due date. b. If written notice of acceptance of this Proposal is mailed, telegraphed or delivered to the undersigned within sixty (60) calendar days after the date of opening of Bids, or any time thereafter before this Proposal is withdrawn, the undersigned will within ten (10) calendar days after the date of such mailing, telegraphing or delivery of such notice, execute an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. c. The undersigned further agrees, if requested by the Owner, to furnish Performance and Payment Bonds pursuant to Article 7 herein within ten (10) calendar days of issuance of such notice. d. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within sixty (60) calendar days following the award of a construction contract. e. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, to waive any informalities in bidding, and to hold all proposals for the above noted period of time. BID FORM BF -8 11. ADDENDUM RECEIPT a. Receipt of the following addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications is acknowledged: Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: Addendum No. Dated: By: Title: Business Address: (Bidder) BID FORM BF -9 CERTIFICATE OF NON -COLLUSION By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of his knowledge and belief: a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder prior to opening, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or with any competitor. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. Dated: By: Title: (Bidder) BID FORM BF -10 CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER I, , certify that I am the of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General Contractors; that , who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the bidder was then of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed, sealed and executed for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body. Dated: (Secretary -Clerk) (CORPORATE SEAL) BID FORM BF -1 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK Rev 08-2012 GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 Owner 1 Section 1.02 Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings 1 Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1 ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 Contractor's Obligations 2 Section 2.02 Contractor's Title to Materials 2 Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2 Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3 Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor 3 Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site Conditions 4 Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4 Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4 Section 2.09 Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors 5 Section 2.10 Meetings 5 Section 2.11 Related Work 5 Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5 Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5 Section 2.14 Project Labor Rates 6 Section 2.15 Daily Reports 6 ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6 Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6 Section 3.03 Inspection of Work 7 Section 3.04 Inspection and Testing 7 Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7 Section 3.06 Acceptance 7 ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 Changes 8 Section 4.02 Form of Change Orders 10 ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 Time of Completion 10 Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 6 Section 6.01 Section 6.02 Section 6.03 ARTICLE 7 Section 7.01 ARTICLE 8 Section 8.01 ARTICLE 9 Section 9.01 ARTICLE 10 Section 10.01 Section 10.02 Section 10.03 Section 10.04 Section 10.05 Section 10.06 Section 10.07 Section 10.08 Section 10.09 Section 10.10 ARTICLE 11 Section 11.01 Section 11.02 ARTICLE 12 Section 12.01 Section 12.02 Section 12.03 Section 12.04 ARTICLE 13 TABLE OF CONTENTS TERMINATION Termination for Cause Termination for Convenience of Owner Owner's Right to do Work DISPUTES Disputes Procedure SUBCONTRACTS Subcontracting COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Cooperation with Other Contractors PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Accidents and Accident Prevention Adjoining Property Emergencies Bonds Risks Assumed by the Contractor Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance Liability Insurance of the Owner Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards Effect of Procurement of Insurance No Third Party Rights Page 11 11 12 12 13 13 15 16 16 16 16 17 18 18 19 19 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Substantial Completion 19 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 19 PAYMENT Provision of Payment Withholding Payments Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment Final Payment and Release TAX EXEMPTION 20 22 22 23 Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 24 11 Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 14 Section 14.01 ARTICLE 15 Section 15.01 Section 15.02 Section 15.03 Section 15.04 Section 15.05 Section. 15.06 Section 15.07 Section 15.08 ARTICLE 16 ARTICLE 17 ARTICLE 18 ARTICLE 19 Section 19.01 Section 19.02 Section 19.03 ARTICLE 20 TABLE OF CONTENTS GUARANTEE Guarantee STANDARD PROVISIONS Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Laws Governing the Contract Assignments No Third Party Rights Waiver of Rights of Owner Nondiscrimination and Affirmative Action Limitation on Actions Owner's Representative ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION ROYALTIES AND PATENTS CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Release of Information Confidential Information Use of Owner's Name Page 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 27 27 27 27 27 28 28 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT 29 111 Rev 08-2012 EXHIBITS A Change Order A-1 Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary B Schedule of Values for Contract Payment C Final Release D Application and Certificate for Payment E Guarantee F Form I Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan Use of MBE and WBE Vendors Form II Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan Summary of Bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and Vendors Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report Form IV Minority -Women Utilization Report G Labor Rate Breakdown H Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation I Contractor Performance Evaluation iv Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 - Owner A. The Owner is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University". B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings, specifications, computations, sketches, test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether furnished to or prepared by the Contractor, are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of this Contract. When requested, the Contractor shall deliver such materials to Cornell University. C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions shall be final except as otherwise expressly provided. D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between the Contractor and other Contractors performing Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Owner. E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal notes contained herein and in said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Section 1.02 - Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a manner approved by the Owner. Section 1.03 - Order of Precedence A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive way of doing the Work, the better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner otherwise so directs in writing. B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans, shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Requirements of reference standards fora a part of these specifications to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. When provisions of reference standards conflict with provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern. 1 Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 - Contractor's Obligations A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins -Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be perfornied by Union labor. B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary Work as may be required. C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, material, tools, equipment, machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations in force among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 2.02 - Contractor's Title to Materials A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all Hens, claims or encumbrances. B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise. Section 2.03 - "Or Equal" Clause A. Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name, catalogue number, or make, no others may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal" considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements, Section 01 25 00. 2 Rev 08-2012 B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered by this Contract, or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision or redesign, and all new drawings and details required therefor shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be approved by the Architect. All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested change shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure. Section 2.04 - Quality, Quantity and Labeling A. The Contractor shall furnish materials and equipment of the quality and quantity specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into the work shall be new and of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative, for their acceptance, full information concerning any material which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. Materials and articles installed or used without such acceptance shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear manufacturer's labels stating that the materials meet said standards. C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test materials as provided in the Contract. D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to submit in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract is executed. Section 2.05 - Superintendence by Contractor A. The Contractor shall employ a full-time competent construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the Work and shall have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing. B. If at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. 3 Rev 08-2012 Section 2.06 - Subsurface or Site Conditions A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the contract consideration includes such provision as the Contractor deems proper for all subsurface conditions as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the provisions of the Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and examination of the site prior to the Owner's receipt of bids. B. hl the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the site differing substantially from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information made available by the Owner or from the Contractor's aforesaid inspection and examination of the site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. Such notice shall include probable cost and/or any impact to the schedule. The Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially differ from that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall be issued. Section 2.07 - Representations of Contractor The Contractor represents and warrants: A. That the Contractor is financially solvent and is experienced in and competent to perform the Work; B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances, orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which may in any way affect the Work; C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely and satisfactorily constructed. D. That the Contractor has carefully examined the Contract and the Site of the Work and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work. Section 2.08 - Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all dimensions and site conditions at the Site before proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said conflict to the Owner. 4 Rev 08-2012 B. During the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to meet field conditions. C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location or spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner. D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of Work, where not dimensioned on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and other affected Contractors and Subcontractors. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the Work in place. F. Should failure of the Contractor to perform services under this section result in additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional costs. Section 2.09 - Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors A. The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, without charge, up to ten (10) sets of Contracts Documents and one (1) set of reproducible sepias. B. Any sets in excess of the number mentioned above may be furnished to the Contractor at the cost of reproduction and mailing. C. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work, and with the exception of the signed Contract Set, are to be returned to the Owner on request at the completion of the work. Section 2.10 - Meetings The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.11 - Related Work The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship of said work to the Work under the Contract. Section 2.12 - Surveys and Layout Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the Contractor all surveys of the property necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the Work. Section 2.13 - Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly before commencing the Work and report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative. 5 Rev 08-2012 Section 2.14 - Project Labor Rates The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance for the duration of the individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit G. Revised rates shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts during this project. Section 2.15 — Daily Reports The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer at the job site. Such reports shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: Name of Project Project Number Date of Report Weather Conditions Equipment on the site Contractors on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor Work/area and activity for each contractor Overtime worked and planned work progress Environmental problems and corrections Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up and check out, occupancy, etc. ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 - Access to the Work The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants, or inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor. In addition, the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications, etc., which may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the work. Section 3.02 - Notice for Testing If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspection, tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided. 6 Rev 08-2012 Section 3.03 - Inspection of Work A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and examination of the work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner that the work will not be delayed. B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the Work, all processes of manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good, replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by said removal or replacement. C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner. Section 3.04 - Inspection and Testing All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or concealed without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the Owner may order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said additional testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. Section 3.05 - Defective or Damaged Work If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be reduced by an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable. Section 3.06 - Acceptance No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor shall excuse any failure by the Contractor to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting therefrom. 7 Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 4 -- CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 - Changes A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes within the general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such change orders. B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance. C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or an adjustment in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by the Owner. D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods: 1. By agreement with the Contractor. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved. This method shall be used if the Contract contains applicable unit prices. (i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable Unit Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and then multiplied by the applicable markup. (iii) Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit, all conditions of the contract and all general requirements such as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field and home office), small tools and expendable items, insurance, taxes, temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "as -built" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit. 8 Rev 08-2012 3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent directly employed at the Site. (ii) Materials (iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly on the Work. 4. By determining the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. E. Mark-ups: 1. Work performed by the Contractor. Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof. 2. Work performed by a Subcontractor. Where the change order work is performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs. 3. Work performed by a Sub -Subcontractor. Where work is performed by a Sub -Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Sub -Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost. 4. No markup shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime pay. 5. No markup shall be paid on insurance, taxes, fringe benefits or bond cost. Where the Work involves both an increase and a reduction in similar or related Work, the above percentage override shall be applied only on the amount, if any, that the cost of the increase exceeds the cost of the reduction. F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit A-1. Each submission shall include a paper copy and an electronic .pdf format of all documentation. 9 Rev 08-2012 G. Unless otherwise specifically provided for in a change order, the compensation specified therein includes a full payment for both the Work covered by the order and for any damage or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any delays to other Work to be done under the Contract resulting from said change order. The Contractor waives all rights to any other compensation for said damage or expense. H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and records relating thereto. Section 4.02 - Form of Change Orders All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved on the Owner's change order form, which is included herein as Exhibit "A" and made a part of the Contract Documents. No alteration to this form shall be acceptable to the Owner and no payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor unless a change order has been issued and approved on said form. ARTICLE 5 -- TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 - Time of Completion A. The Work shall be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner and shall be completed no later than the date of completion specified in the Contract. All required overtime to maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid. B. The date of beginning and the time for completion of the Work, as specified in the Contract, are essential conditions of the Contract. C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure full completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, that the time for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions prevailing in the locality of the Site. D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in which additional time is allowed for the completion of any Work, the new time of completion established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect's or Owner's judgment, it becomes necessary at any time during construction to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas. E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perforin same only on approved schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas. F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to: 10 Rev 08-2012 1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government of the United States or the State of New York; 2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including, but not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe weather. G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be extended for: 1. all of the Work, or 2, only that portion of the Work altered by the change order. H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. ARTICLE 6 -- TERMINATION Section 6.01 - Termination for Cause In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The notice shall briefly state the reasons for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the Contract shall terminate upon the date specified by the Owner in the notice. h1 the event of termination, the Owner may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and Contractor's surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the event of such termination the Owner may take possession of and niay utilize such materials, appliances, and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in completing the Work. Section 6.02 - Termination for Convenience of Owner The Owner, at any time, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration of the Contract. In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the Work and prosecute same to completion. 11 Rev 08-2012 Section 6.03 - Owner's Right to do Work The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due the Contractor. ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES Section 7.01 - Disputes Procedure A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to perforin will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall: 1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed within fifteen (15) working days after being ordered to perform the disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen (15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract. 2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work in accordance with the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the Owner. 3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed matter. 4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days after such decision, shall deliver to the Owner a verified written statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's claim and such determination shall be final. The Contractor may file a notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply with the Owner's decision and complete the work as directed. B. No claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner. C. The value of claims for extra work, if allowed, shall be determined by the methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions. 12 Rev 08-2012 D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Article 7 shall be deemed to be: 1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract; 2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, time extension, or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 - Subcontracting A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed Subcontractor and Sub -Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award any Work to any Subcontractor or Sub -Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same power to terminate any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor. E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall control and coordinate the Work of Subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship between Subcontractors and the Owner. ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 - Cooperation with Other Contractors A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However, the Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate contracts. hi that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with the Owner's forces or separate Contractors. 13 Rev 08-2012 B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges these conditions and shall bear the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of other contractors. C. The Contractor shall keep informed of the progress and workmanship of other contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors where said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the Contractor's operations. D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work. E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require. The Owner shall not be liable for any damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by the Owner, or by reason of another contractor's default in performance. F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work with the work of other contractors as the Owner has directed: 1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and 2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the Owner may be subjected or which the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions. G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for said damage. H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor shall reimburse said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all said claims. 14 Rev 08-2012 ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY Section 10.01 - Accidents and Accident Prevention A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of persons engaged in the performance of the work. The Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or operation of said Work, plant, appliances and methods. B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work, arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death. The Contractor shall supply the Owner with all Contractor and Subcontractor written accident investigation forms and accident reports prepared. C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 20 or the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (eg. special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective equipment, or additional ventilation), shall be brought to the attention of Cornell University for review and approval, prior to their use on site. 1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor shall be clearly labeled. The label shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's name. 2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals shall be made aware of the hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's recommendations shall be used at all times. 3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or the quantity of waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. E. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard the Owner's property from injury or loss in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace or make good any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner. F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage thereto until Final Acceptance. 15 Rev 08-2012 Section 10.02 - Adjoining Property A. The Contractor shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors thereof, by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the Contract. Section 10.03 - Emergencies A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons or property, the Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury, and the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken. Section 10.04 - Bonds A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing shall constitute a default. Section 10.05 - Risks Assumed by the Contractor A. Indemnification. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work including, but not limited to, those arising out of bodily or personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or destruction of tangible property, including the loss of use resulting therefrom, to which the Owner, its agents or employees may be subjected by reason of any negligent act or omission, willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by the Owner, except to the extent caused by Owner's own negligence. 1. In the event that any party is requested but refuses to honor the indemnity obligations hereunder, then the party indemnifying shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost of bringing any such action, including attorneys' fees, to the party requesting indemnity. B. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of any payment shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular claims for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for risk or claims of the type enumerated. 16 Rev 08-2012 Section 10.06 - Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense, until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance: 1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the requirements of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be applicable thereto, including Coverage B - Employer's Liability with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed operations, explosion, collapse and underground property damage coverage's issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations under this Contract, all obligations assumed by the Contractor under this Contract and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability hnsurance, and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary coverage. The completed operations coverage's shall be maintained for not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM) S 5,000,000 Each Occurrence S 5,000,000 Aggregate 3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection with the work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non -owned and hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear license plates. The coverage under such policy shall be not Less than a combined single limit for Bodily hnjury and Property Damage of: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY S 1,000,000 Each Person $ 1,000,000 Each Accident B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability, including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits as required under this section. 17 Rev 03-2012 C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by or on behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. D. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor's certificates. Such certificates shall be on a foam prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage's and shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, unless the Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of the Contractor's insurance coverage's, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate of insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified copy of each policy including any and all exclusions to such policy. E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled, terminated or modified so that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said work is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's expense. Section 10.07 - Liability Insurance of the Owner A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability insurance as will, in its opinion, protect the Owner from its contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract. 18 Rev 08-2012 Section 10.08 - Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form and in an amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications to the contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision that the insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall cover the entire work at the site, including reasonable compensation for architects services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions of the work located away from the site and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may be legally necessary. The policy shall cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover "all risk" of physical loss including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University has agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University a certificate of insurance and a summary of coverage's including all endorsements and exclusions prior to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between Cornell University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior to final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work together to obtain consent of the insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms. B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or nature. D. The foregoing provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their employees, of whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract incident to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents, regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor, subcontractors and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of whatever kind or nature. 19 Rev 08-2012 Section 10.09 - Effect of Procurement of Insurance A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the Owner or the Contractor shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract or to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks. Section 10.10 - No Third Party Rights A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any claim or right of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 — Substantial Completion A. The term "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent that Cornell University may have uninterrupted occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy required prior to occupancy, and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other authority having jurisdiction. Section 11.02 - Occupancy Prior to Acceptance A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, or any part thereof, which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner. B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems, materials or elements of the Work, nor shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract. C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which shall not unreasonably interfere with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner. ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT Section 12.01 - Provision for Payment A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor for the performance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents. 20 Rev 08-2012 B. The final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications have been retuned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract. C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses in accord with the following procedure: 1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as specified herein, shall be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule, attached hereto as Exhibit "B" and made a part of the Contract Documents, when approved by the Owner and Architect shall be used as a basis for progress payments. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved schedule. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a meeting shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted by the Contractor in the requisition for payment. (b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the Contractor shall submit a written statement, including Contract Number, full name of the project and the name of the Owner's Representative as set forth in Article 15, Section 15.08, in approved format to the Architect with five (5) copies, setting forth in detail the cost of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and including the last day of the previous month and shall make application for payment of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price. (c) Each statement and application shall be accompanied by duplicate copies of an affidavit, executed by the Contractor, certifying that the statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress payment, have been paid. Before final payment is made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls, material bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid, including final waivers of any liens. (d) If, pursuant to a prior written agreement with the Owner, payments are requested on account of materials or equipment not incorporated in the work which have been delivered and suitably stored at the site, or at some other location, such payments shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale, insurance certificates, notice of bonded warehousing, in accordance with Exhibit "H". The Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting materials stored off-site to the site. 21 Rcv 08-2012 3. Each such application for payment shall be subject to the review and approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the payment applied for is due and payable to the Contractor. The Architect shall submit the approved applications for payment to: Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application for Payment, that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt of the approved Certificate from the Architect. However, by issuing a Certificate for Payment, the Architect shall not hereby be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 5. Any reduction with respect to retention shall be done in accordance with the Change Order provisions as outlined in Article 4 of these General Conditions. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner a written request for such reduction including a Consent of the Surety for such reduction. 6. The remaining ten percent (10%) of the value of the work done and materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the Owner as part security for the faithful performance of the Contractor's work within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.04. D. "Schedule of Amounts for Contract Payments" and "Schedule Contractors Monthly Requisitions" (AIA Document G702; Application and Certificate for Payment) must be submitted, in the form as those contained herein as Exhibit "D", to comply with requirements for tax exemption. 22 Rev 08-2012 Section 12.02 - Withholding Payments A. The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of: 1. Defective work not remedied. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or materials for the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's property. 3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the Contract Price then unpaid. 4. Damage to another Contractor. 5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor. 6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method Network Schedule. Section 12.03 — Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment A. As -Built Documentation 1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current reproducible full-size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner all instances where actual field construction differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Final Documentation: 1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance of a final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following documents with the Owner. a. Warranties, Bonds, Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications. b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub -Contractors in accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto. c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 39. d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been completed. e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 23. 23 Rev 08-2012 f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 22. 2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or Word Documents of all documentation. Section 12.04 - Final Payment and Release A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect. B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully performed, and if bonds have been required, the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the Contract Documents, has been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and sub -subcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the entire balance is due and payable. D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final certificate. E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and liability to the Contractor. ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 - Tax Exemption A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools, machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into the completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools, machinery, equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials. 24 Rev 08-2012 B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation. ARTICLE 14 -- GUARANTEE Section 14.01 - Guarantee A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept various components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the project on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract shall be deemed to be inserted therein. Section 15.02 - Laws Governing the Contract The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. Section 15.03 - Assignments The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written consent of the Owner. Section 15.04 - No Third Party Rights Nothing in the Contract shall create or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. 25 Rev 08-2012 Section 15.05 - Waiver of Rights of Owner A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner except when such waiver is given in writing. Section 15.06 - Nondiscrimination and Affirmative Action A. The Contractor shall submit copies of their Affirmative Action Program and the Affirmative Action Programs of its proposed subcontractors within thirty (30) days after execution of a contract. A meeting to review these forms will be scheduled by the Owner after receipt of the same. Such Affirmative Action Programs must be satisfactory to the Owner. The Contractor shall designate a Compliance Officer in their organization who shall be responsible for implementing the Affirmative Action Program of the Contractor and its subcontractors. Said Compliance Officer shall make such periodic, but not less than monthly, reports on the Plans' progress and on the number of women and minority workers employed. These reports shall be submitted to the Owner Representative on the Affirmative Action Workforce Report and Minority - Women Utilization Report attached hereto as Exhibit "F". B. The Contractor agrees, in addition to any other nondiscrimination provisions of the Contract, that the Contractor shall comply fully with and shall cooperate in the implementation of any Affirmative Action Requirements for Equal Employment Opportunity and Minority Business Enterprises (MBE) participation required by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. Any such requirements shall be incorporated in their entirety in all subcontracts of any tier. C. These provisions shall be deemed supplementary to the nondiscrimination provisions required by applicable federal and state law. D. The Contractor shall submit for Owner approval, a plan of affirmative action designed to assure minority group members an equal opportunity in employment and subcontract work within thirty (30) days of contract award. The Contractor's Affirmative Action Plan must be approved by the Owner. E. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "F" and made a part of the Contract Documents, are to be used in submitting Affirmative Action Plans and hereby made a part of the Contract Documents. 1. Use of MBE and WBE Vendors (Form I) 2. Summary of bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and Vendors (Form II) 3. Affirmative Action Workforce Report (Form III) 4. Minority -Women Utilization Report (Form IV) This Plan is supplementary to all federal and state nondiscrimination requirements. Cornell University is an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer. 26 Rev 08-2012 F. The goals for participation (minority and female), expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate work force in each trade on all construction work, are as follows: Carpenters 4.8% Electricians 14.1% Laborers 7.8% Masons 2.8% Painters 25.7% Plumbers 5.9% Sheetmetal Workers 4.0% G. The Contractor shall demonstrate compliance with these goals by submission of the Affirmative Action Workforce Report (Exhibit F — Form III) on a monthly basis. The Prime Contractor shall provide a single monthly report inclusive of all subcontractor information for the project labor. On-site office personnel should not be included in the "workforce" totals. Such forms shall be submitted to: Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Section 15.07 - Limitation on Actions No action or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner of the Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination. Section 15.08 - Owner's Representative The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents and shall render approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University's designated representative (RANDALL NESBITT) shall be recognized by the Contractor. 27 Rear 08-2012 ARTICLE 16 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at the Contractor's local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed, except that if any litigation, claim or audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims or audit findings involving the records have been resolved.. Each Sub - Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the project. ARTICLE 17 — CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION The Owner shall schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50%) based on project invoicing and at project completion to review with the Contractor their performance for the project unless performance warrants additional reviews. The Owner shall present its review based on the attached "Contractor Performance Evaluation", Exhibit 1. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the evaluation after completion by the Owner. ARTICLE 18 -- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University harmless from loss on account thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or product is specified by Cornell University unless the Contractor shall have reason to believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be responsible for loss on account thereof unless it promptly provides such information to Cornell University. ARTICLE 19 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 19.01 - Release of Infonnation The Contractor shall not divulge information concerning the Work (including news releases, internal house organs, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone without Cornell University's prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the extent that they need such information to perform their work. The Contractor shall require a similar agreement from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its release and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager. 28 Rev 08-2012 Section 19.02 - Confidential hiformation The term "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or received from Cornell University during the tens of this Contract which relates to Cornell University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not disclose confidential information to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and until authorized by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use confidential information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to comply with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be sought from Connell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures are made. This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties. Section 19.03 - Use of Owner's Name The Contractor shall not use, in its external, advertising, marketing program, or other promotional efforts, any date, pictures, or other representation of the Owner except on the specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's Representative. ARTICLE 20 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/fonns/contractors.cfin. This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. hn addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel: You may file a report to on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.conn/domain/en/report_custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077. 29 Rev 08-2012 Cornell University Facilities Services CHANGE ORDER Cornell University Facilities Contracts 121 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853 EXHIBIT "A" Distribution to: OWNER ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR FIELD OTHER PROJECT: TO (Contractor): You are directed to make the following changes in this Contract: Item No. Description CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: INITIATION DATE: OWNER'S CONTRACT NO: CONTRACT DATE: Reference Amount Not valid until signed by both the Owner and Contractor. Signature of the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement herewith, including any adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Tinie. The original (Contract Price) was $ Net change by previously authorized Change Orders $ The (Contract Price) prior to this Change Order was $ The (Contract Price) will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by this Change Order $ The new (Contract Price) including this Change Order will be $ The Contract Tinie will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by ( ) Days. The Date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is AUTHORIZED SIGNATURES: CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONTRACTOR OWNER BY BY TITLE TITLE DATE DATE EXHIBIT "A-1" CORNELL UNIVERSITY Division of Facilities Services Construction Contract Change Order Forms Instructions to Change Order Documentation Facilities Services ("FS") has created this Standard Change Contract Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms to facilitate preparation of contract change orders in conformity with construction contract requirements. The forms have been prepared to comply with contract requirements presented in the General Conditions, dated August 2012. The Change Order Request form shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner the Change Order Summary Form with all associated back-up documentation. Direct Cost of the Work: 1. Direct Labor — Include the "wages paid" hourly direct labor and/or foreman necessary to perform the required change. "Wages paid" is the burdened labor rate documented in accordance with Section 2.14 — Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. "Assigned Personnel or Work Crews" should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory personnel on the job -site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not be included as Direct Labor 2. Direct Material — Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to perform the required change. Examples of "Unit of Measure" include square feet, cubic yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc. 3. Equipment — Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-owned equipment items, include documentation of internal rental rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed. Bond Premiums The Contractor's actual documented bond premium rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change. Overhead & Profit The Contractor's overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change in accordance with the Contract. CORNELL UNIVERSITY FACILITIES SERVICES EXHIBIT "A -l' CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER REQUEST COR PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. LJ Name of Contractor/Subcontractor performing Work: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. DIRECT COST OF WORK: 1 LABOR (.4.1-iacli SupponinF Dacument3tim) ASSIGNED PERSONNEL OR WORK CREW ALATERLAL (Attach Supp. --111:4 D:runentatca) .MATERLAL REQIIRED FOR CHANGE 3 EQUIPMENT (Acta :1) Supporting Doti) EQLTPMENT REQUIRED FOR CHANGE 4 OVERHEAD AND PROFIT 5 BOND PREIIHUNI HOURLY W RATE P. ROIJRS LABOR TOTAL MATERIAL TOTAL EQUIPMENT TOTAL DIRECT COST (SUM 1, 2, 3) OH&P Rue Bond Premium Rate TOTAL COST TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDEDDELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE TOTAL COST TOTAL COST TOTAL COST 11111111111111111111 111111111111111111111 CORNELL UNIVERSITY FACILITIES SERVICES EXHIBIT "A -I" CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CILk.NGE ORDER SUNSIARY COR PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. DIRECT COST OF WORK: 1 NAME OF CONTRACTORISUBCONTR_ACTOR PERFORMENG WORK 4 PRIME CONTRACTOR OVERHLAD AND PROFIT 5 PRLILE CONTRACTOR BOYD PREMIUM DIRECT COST (S1.7aI 1. 2, 3) OH&P Rate Baud Premium Rate TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED CRINGE ORDER ITEM TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE TOTAL COST 00 0 U cG 0 U 0 O 1 0 a) -0 0 O U W o H 0 zz FINAL RELEASE FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS Date Contract Date Project Contract Price Address Net Extras and Deductions EXHIBIT "C" City Adjusted Contract Price County Amount Previously Paid State Balance Due - Final Payment The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract. In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the payment of S being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: The undersigned further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully -paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material persons or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract. Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name Day of 20 By: Title: 0 LLi 0 Er. cc 0 0 .1. 0 APPLICATION NO.: TO OWNER: CONTRACT DATE: VIA ARCHITECT: FROM CONTRACTOR: CONTRACT FOR: I. ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM CONTRACTOR: c -0 0 c t .Y.). t 7) z E 0 ..) (..) v, E z 'S CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT .9 *4 *4 .9 *4 2. Net change by Change Orders 3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Line 1 ± 2) OS 8. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE 3 AMOUNT CERTIFIED w z ZI'c" w 0 z 0 z cf) Uo o --' w z — m 0\ EXHIBIT "D" 00 o 0 0.0 E >, 0. C Z3, u z " 0 *th. O d - 80 .0 -5 o ,z) DEDUCTIONS ADDITIONS CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY .0 00. 0 NET CHANGES by Change Order e es= g B z t5'e " . E Er' a 8 z 0 0 z t • " 5 I': z <13 ij =' C7 a L 0 on reverse side) AIA DOCUMENT G703 (Instruc CONTINUATION SHEET APPLICATION NO.: APPLICATION DATE: PERIOD TO: ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO.: AIA Document G702, APPLICATION AND C EXHIBIT "D" z a 0 U> c 0 < _F o F 3 z RETAINAGE (IF VARIABLE) RATE) BALANCE TO FINISH (C - G) 0 (3 c -1- TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE (D+E+F) MATERIALS PRESENTLY S'T'ORED (NOT 1N D OR E) WORK COMPLETED 0 0 C W 0. v; I- 0 FROM PREVIOUS APPLICATION (D + E) v SCHEDULED VALUE 0 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Fz z a 0 U> c 0 < _F o F 3 z GUARANTEE Date: EXHIBIT E" In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell University dated , we hereby guarantee the as found in the specifications for , Ithaca, New York to be free (Project Title) from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of year(s) from , the date of acceptance by the Owner. (Date) By: Title: (COMPANY) EXHIBIT "F" FORM I cus D JlrY CONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN Use of MBE and WBE Vendors Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT: Amount of Contract: $ Name of Prime Contract Bidder: Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code): Telephone Number (Including Area Code): Trade: List previous Cornell University work done by your firm: 2. Do you intend to subcontract any work on this project? Yes A. What is the total dollar value of work you intend to subcontract? Amount $ AND Range: From $ to No 3. Do you intend to purchase supplies and/or use vendor services? A. What is the total dollar value of your intended purchase and/or vendor? Amount $ AND Range: From $ to $ 4. List the work you plan to subcontract in area A. below and list the items you propose to purchase and/or vendor services you propose to use in area B. Use additional sheet(s) if required. A. Trade Amount of Work to be B. Supplies and/or Vendor Services Subcontracted Trade Amount $ Item Amount $ EXHIBIT "F" FORM I 5. Indicate by dollar value and percentage of contract, the total of your goal for minority and female vendors and subcontractor participation including your goal for purchases and services. (The percentage given should be a percentage of your total contract amount. MBE Amount $ AND Percentage WBE Amount $ AND Percentage 6. Indicate your goal for minority participation in the labor force by dollar value and percentage of total monthly manpower per trade. MBE Amount $ AND Percentage WBE Amount $ AND Percentage 7. List MBE and WBE vendors utilized by your firm over the past five (5) years: MBE or WBE Vendor CONTRACT (Indicate which) ADDRESS PROJECT TRADE AMOUNT This space provided for any comments your organization may have regarding the utilization of MBE and WBE vendors: OFFICER OF PRIME CONTRACT BIDDER: Name and Title: Date: Signature: 2 EXHIBIT "F" FORM II CONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN Summary of Bid Activity with MBE and WBE Subcontractors and Vendors Please print or type all information, except where a signature is required. PROJECT: Name of Prime Contract Bidder: Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code): Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number): MBE and WBE Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of (Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination EXPLANATION OF ELMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc. (Use additional sheet if necessary) OFFICER OF FIRM: Name and Title: Date: Signature: 0 0 0 0 - ij 0 Ll. Please print or type all inform CORNELL UNIVERSITY TRACTOR PRIME CO U LL) 0 MINORITY - WOMEN UTILITZATION REPORT U ' U O 0 Dollar Dollar '%D of Dollar Prime Contractor, Craft Amount Amount Prime Amount Subcontractor and and/or of Minority Firm of Total Women Firm of Sub -Subcontractor's Name Trade Subcontract! Name - Awards . Trade MBE Contracts Contract Name - Awards Trade WBE Contract a E r E( Cornell Un rsity Facilities Services PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACTOR: TRADE: B3:e Hourly Rate: Payr©U Tamen and Insurance FICA. Fede -al Ur emplci:.auent State Unemployment * Worket's Compensation Borlity Injury Sc Property Damage Disability EXHIBIT "G" LABOR FATE BREAKDOWN CONTRACT NO. EFFECTIVE DATE: EXPIRATION DATE: FA per Hour TOTAL Payroll Taxes and Insurance Rtes: Base Rate (n) Total % = * Rates are net Contractor cost after prenitma discounts and experience modificatiom have been applied against manual rate.. Supplemental Benefit: Vacanon Health & Welfare Pension Annuity Edu—sation kthroliTY S per Hour Total Hourly Fringe Benefits Hourly Labor. Fate: Base Rate, Taxesasurance and Fringe Benefits AdiuMreeet for a composite rate which includes apprentices: CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION 1 certify that the labor rates, ins actual and true cost incurred. Signature of Authorized Representative: Print Name: Print Title: .OtatWOS. labor ite enunaorafiont d mtpemes are con -eat and in accordance with Cornell University Facilities Services STORED MATERIALS INVOICING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: SUBCONTRACTOR: REASON FOR REQUEST: APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. DATE: :Material Identification Description: Quantity: Provide Specific Location of \Materials Stored: Material Value S Attach an Invoice or Quantified States wilt of Value. Certificate of Insurance Attach a Certificate of Insurance for the above specified materials. Certificate shall name "Connell University" as a loss payee with respect to the specified materials. 4 Transfer of Title The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete ownership of all listed materials to Connell University at the time payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payment The Contractor remains responsible for all contractual requirements for the above listed materials including complete installation and providing of all warranties. Signed: Date: EXHIBIT "H" 11 University Services EXHIBIT "I" Exhibit 1 Contractor Performance Evaluation Project Information Pri*ct Fs-6,..ect Tewn: Carroes: Prcszt .S7„srt Zak.: EvaUabns.}.., SZValtia: Corn:Veto:1: Da.ts cIT EvatJ rc. Contractor anzi ,troct Anry.nt: Contra:, -1,3 M&: Cantwtv- Slip,:rtntendent Trade Cate,?.. -..NA Toti Charge Ocrke:Arre:,unt LIPrelmlnari EvaIntim Flia Evuluatoi Type of Contract LI prn Cyrsasty LIConst=1= Managent ProlactCcmTeitslae=r.i3n: Performance Evaluation Please give one rating for each category. Add comments as required tojustify your ratir,g_ Unacceptable 1 1 Quality of WorlirnomMia 1 Rare L-15 cciritractorarforriarice )-',17.--gsrnz to patty cr work • Corricaarce s211 przie:IdraMngs and spectncesions 2. Viortrnanslilp ano urscy c. TOVS - quVity and suninern osantoiiy • EwOmerit - siffoient granny and operatirg coriaton • Gimpy of Janne perearne Comrrents: 2 ScheciutingtProducelvity Rate Sas cconacticris wnr regard to pruductfu an -4 me -:22 (20 0221&3t2122 2220 20002220. • Projen 2221221222 egiality and openplateress 2. Corisonng 01 3i -On isinisaii is 0. Manpswer ailxialion mentainirg przient sapeare Materia derrieres to, suppar 323 2102 e. Wilitity to meat swrstartisi 2132(122312 3222 prnect milestopas Prockitif of work firrios Cpwirreirrin 1 Poor 1AvErage I very Good 1 EaceI(nt 3 4 5 2 3 4 3 Subcortrxtor Managetwert Rate tins cannactions abirryi effort aria spccess012121222312232210 0232 123 ispianoirenpra (f(00 zwaro(1inappora 2222 22122 consrecoors overall project rnanageroent pG!fon•rnace) Canna:ern: MBEPNBE Porticipailon Rare the cor,Miro' 115EiVIBE 5022032 212212 222232321102 102 INS 323002202Rro.,ecii Team, 312 22211 Meterta Veinr. C ailments : 2 3 4 4 5 5 Safety Rate tnits CaSZECtarZ perVinirite, 21r92r32 to project safety. a. an -32y stbrilission pt site spenno safety prog-ani 22. Knorresige pif OSHA standards c. rapietrentallon or safety nres anti taairations a Prompt:an and ae atW of safety awareness Daty arci overall housekeeping f. 2222223 222002 3.Respwrise tp safety annems tp Awareness at pa-PO:paten/ Contparts: 2 5 Unaccept2bFa 1 Poor 1 Average 1 very Good 1 Excellent t Contact Adminletratn 1 2 3 4 5 Rafe ru5 c,r,a7'.ac / pellyrnalcR c*:' r, 3ras to cQit2c(a 5T:.itc.reMn as per rrxena gee . a. Tinsty ELZrrisaZac^.' =pate afd correct gact.rnamon. r llreu rpT IrtEtraicz altl Vonda Criany oriel prr.x.›F olr.j c. s a•;y sLtrr s - RF1'. &102 crokIncra and CFo-ar ▪ Sr, irvttroct po.y,r rrs male prorrgrt-y '.rays rrr sem.. ccfrplette a=,1 core ct payment opprcatcas t Cwtyc page - -k i ' orptng Rath ftp 5 Rare tilts c5.. act5r,. W € iv rea.,O, rvffps r h cnErp 6_y (Le, Camel,. e JFF: p=rofes:31 i1a; cli,':cotitrar.ta t_, etc) 5 Supervisory Personnel RR nJ Rare Vie oveiteNpatformerna of t<h = c: t to cr,c4a. a t sc f pezotretand ptD5c nasega_ ent craft. Co rrv`_n`s. Crrtract ctoae-Qvt Rare tqlo ccr,Yac r4art at ty cer ,cs nt C(C.5e u:tyra pra.,4ct a. Timely cn1 t tcno'to€iptm t:€st Items v. Gm f4y resciutIm of all CdtS t�'35.`r clionge,arders r.Timals.ZrrisVon « at co.wrtt 63c rnen s 405Ms, Warranties„ General CcetractctiSutccritat r r;ta Rees ore Consent of r Q att o' close -cut dccuTertaton and timely carp;«0r ofanyot; t 5ng audit g Summary Sheet v 0 rj Contractor: a C .c, 0 0 Li 6 o 0 C'. o OTO s o ci If:, 6 1^.; o 0 o CD ti) ,F Performance Categories Quality of VVorkmanship ctb .c .0... c c, ri c .4 7 ..e,iii0 a ...3 -t iii m Contract Administration 0 tro c) I:» o rx -c-, c c o EL 0 . c M c 0 Performance Categories Quality of VVorkmanship ctb .c .0... c c, ri c .4 7 ..e,iii0 a ...3 -t iii m Contract Administration 0 tro c) I:» o rx -c-, c c o EL 0 . c M c 0 N *tr 10 ,r) N. COc 5 e the discussion meeting by the Contractor u GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WILLA ST IGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY CO ELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853 24 MARCH 2014 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF THE WORK Subsection 1.1 Work Under Contract 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES Subsection 1.1 Related Documents 1.2 Description of Requirements 1.3 Schedule of Allowances PAGE 01 11 00-1 01 21 00-1 01 21 00-1 01 21 00-2 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS Subsection 1 1 General 01 25 00-1 1.2 Products List 01 25 00-1 1.3 Contractor's Options 01 25 00-1 1.4 Substitutions 01 25 00-1 1.5 Contractor's Representation 01 25 00-2 1.6 Architect's Duties 01 25 00-3 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS Subsection 11 Description 013119-1 1.2 Pre -Construction Meeting 01 31 19-1 1.3 Progress Meetings 01 31 19-3 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Subsection 1.1 General 01 32 16-1 1.2 Form of Schedules 01 32 16-1 1.3 Content of Schedules 01 32 16-1 1.4 Progress Revisions 01 32 16-2 1.5 Submissions 01 32 16-3 1.6 Distribution 01 32 16-3 1.7 Restricted Work Dates 01 32 16-3 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION Subsection 1.1 Description 3.1 Progress Photographs 01 32 33-1 01 32 33-1 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Subsection 1.1 General 01 33 00-1 1.2 Shop Drawings 01 33 00-1 1.3 Product Data 01 33 00-2 1.4 Samples 01 33 00-2 1.5 Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals 01 33 00-3 1.6 Contractor Responsibilities 01 33 00-3 1.7 Submittal Procedures 01 33 00-5 24 MARCH 2014 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2 01 35 29 01 35 43 01 35 44 01 41 00 01 45 00 1.8 Resubmission Requirements 1.9 Architect's Duties 1.10 Distribution GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Subsection 1.1 General 1.2 Contractor's Safety Plan 1.3 Asbestos & Lead 1.4 Site Visits Job Specific Safety Manual Checklist Pre -Renovation Asbestos Survey 01 33 00-7 01 33 00-7 01 33 00-8 01 35 29-1 01 35 29-1 01 35 29-1 01 35 29-2 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Subsection 1.1 General 01 35 43-1 1.2 Related Sections 01 35 43-1 1.3 Submittals 01 35 43-1 1.4 Job Site Administration 01 35 43-1 1.5 Noise and Vibration 01 35 43-2 1.6 Dust Control 01 35 43-2 1.7 Protection of the Environment 01 35 43-2 1.8 Temporary Re -Routing of Piping and Ductwork 01 35 43-3 1.9 Hazardous or Toxic Materials 01 35 43-3 1.12 Disposal of Waste Material and Title 01 35 43-4 Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan Definitions for Use with Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan SPILL CONTROL Subsection 1.1 Spill Prevention 01 35 44-1 1.2 Spill Control Procedures 01 35 44-1 1.3 Spill Reporting and Documentation 01 35 44-3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Subsection 1.1 Permits and Licenses 01 41 00-1 1.2 Inspections 01 41 00-1 1.3 Compliance 01 41 00-1 1.4 Owner's Requirements 01 41 00-1 QUALITY CONTROL Subsection 1.1 Description 01 45 00-1 1.2 Control of On -Site Construction 01 45 00-1 1.3 Control of Off -Site Operations 01 45 00-2 1.4 Testing 01 45 00-2 1.5 Owner's Representative 01 45 00-2 24 MARCH 2014 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 3 01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Subsection 1.1 General 01 45 29-1 1.2 Qualifications of Laboratory 01 45 29-1 1.3 Laboratory Duties 01 45 29-1 1.4 Limitations of Authority of Testing Laboratory 01 45 29-3 1.5 Contractor's Responsibilities 01 45 29-3 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Subsection 1.1 Description 01 50 00-1 1.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 01 50 00-1 2.1 Materials, General 01 50 00-1 2.2 Temporary First Aid Facilities 01 50 00-1 2.3 Temporary Fire Protection 01 50 00-1 2.4 Construction Aids 01 50 00-2 2.5 Temporary Enclosures 01 50 00-2 2.6 Guardrails and Barricades 01 50 00-3 2.7 Temporary Staging Area 01 50 00-3 2.8 Project Identification and Signs 01 50 00-3 2.9 Security 01 50 00-3 2.10 Field Offices 01 50 00-3 3.1 Preparation 01 50 00-3 3.2 General 01 50 00-4 3.3 Removal 01 50 00-4 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES Subsection 1.1 Description 01 51 00-1 1.2 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 01 51 00-1 2.1 Materials, General 01 51 00-1 2.2 Temporary Electricity, Lighting and Water 01 51 00-1 2.3 Temporary Use of Elevator 01 51 00-2 2.4 Temporary Ventilation 01 51 00-2 2.5 Contractor Telephone Service 01 51 00-2 2.6 Temporary Sanitary Facilities 01 51 00-3 3.1 Removal 01 51 00-3 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION Subsection 1.1 General 01 66 00-1 1.2 Transportation and Handling 01 66 00-1 1.3 Storage 01 66 00-1 1.4 Protection 01 66 00-2 1.5 Protection After Installation 01 66 00-3 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 24 MARCH 2014 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 4 Subsection 1.1 Description 01 73 29-1 1.2 Historic Building Identification 01 73 29-2 1.3 Contractor's Responsibility 01 73 29-2 1.4 Submittals 01 73 29-2 1.5 Quality Assurance 01 73 29-3 1.6 Warranties 01 73 29-4 2.1 Materials 01 73 29-4 3.1 Inspection 01 73 29-4 3.2 Preparation 01 73 29-4 3.3 Perfornance 01 73 29-5 3.4 Cleaning 01 73 29-6 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSE OUT Subsection 1.1 Inspections 01 77 00-1 1.2 Final Clean -Up 01 77 00-1 1.3 Maintenance Stock 01 77 00-2 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 23-1 1.2 Form of Submittals 01 78 23-1 1.3 Content of Manual 01 78 23-2 1.4 Manual for Materials and Finishes 01 78 23-3 1.5 Manual for Equipment and Systems 01 78 23-4 1.6 Submittal Schedule 01 78 23-6 1.7 Instructions of Owner's Personnel 01 78 23-6 1.8 Operating Instructions 01 78 23-7 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 36-1 1.2 Submittal Requirements 01 78 36-1 1.3 Form of Submittals 01 78 36-1 1.4 Time of Submittals 01 78 36-2 1.5 Submittals Required 01 78 36-2 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS Subsection 1.1 General 01 78 39-1 1.2 Maintenance of Documents and Samples 01 78 39-1 1.3 Recording 01 78 39-1 1.4 Submittal 01 78 39-3 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK 1.1 WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT GENERAL A. Work to be Done, includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Selective demolition: floor platform framing, suspended ceiling, partitions, and limestone/bluestone masonry wall. 2. Concrete: incidental floor infill at threshold of schedule masonry opening. 3. Masonry: reconstruction of existing opening from a window to a door. 4. Metal: modifications to an existing metal railing and scheduled door hardware. 5. Wood: framing borrowed light in existing partition walls, casings, chair rail and base trim to match existing, and blocking for wood door jamb and panels. 6. Openings: stile and rail wood doors, door hardware, leaded glass glazing. 7. Finishes: gypsum drywall soffit and partitions, acoustical panel ceiling, tile carpeting, and interior painting. 8. Fire protection: reconfiguration of existing sprinkler heads to accommodate new room layout and ceiling finish. 9. Mechanical: Limited removals, installation of ductwork, duct insulation, and firestopping. 10. Electrical: Reconfiguration of existing circuitry to accommodate new room layout, recessed light fixtures, and exit signage. B. The Scope of the Work 1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions at the site, joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning entity. 2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the.;drawings, but which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1 24 MARCH 2014 C. Intent of Contract Documents 1. The use of the word (or words): a. "provide" means furnish, install and connect ready for use; b. "furnish" means supply and deliver to job or where directed; c. "as approved" or "approved" means Architect's or Owner's approval; d. "as directed" means Owner's direction or instruction; e. "to do", "provide", "furnish", "install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are directions given to the Contractor; f "concealed" means Work installed in pipe shafts, chases or recesses, behind furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable; g. "exposed" means all Work not identified as concealed. 2. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings. 3. Reference to a technical society, institution, association or governmental authority is in accordance with following abbreviations: a. ACI American Concrete hnstitution b. AGA American Gas Association c. AGCA Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. d. AIA American Institute of Architects e. AISC American Institute of Steel Construction f. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Associates, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute h. ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration hnstitute i. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. j. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers k. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials 1. AWSC American Welding Society Code m. AWWA American Water Works Association n. IBR hnstitute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers o. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers P. NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters q. NEC National Electric Code r. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association s. NEPA National Fire Protection Association t. SBI Steel Boiler hnstitute u. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association v. UFPO Underground Facilities Protective Organization w. UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 4. All references to codes, specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-2 24 MARCH 2014 5. Install All Work in Compliance with: a. Building Code of New York State b. National Electric Code c. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). d. Life Safety Code NFPA 101. e. All local ordinances f. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same. D. Use of the Site 1. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio communication devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. 3. The Contractor shall safeguard the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent roadways, parking areas, and footpaths, and shall conform to all laws and regulations concerning the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Owner's Representative. 4. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities to that area of the site defined on the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines. 5. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed in other than the defined areas, including operations involving delivery and removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the Owner's Representative, to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces. 6. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such repair work shall include reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guaranty of Work. 7. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall be as indicated in the Contract or as directed by the Owner's Representative. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-3 24 MARCH 2014 E. Parking 1. The Owner has a designated area for Contractor parking on Solidago Road. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation from the designated parking area to the construction site as necessary. 2. It should be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. Parking is available at any metered space in the Willard Straight Hall parking lot for a fee of $60 per week or $158.57 per month. The Contractor should contact the Project Manager, Randall Nesbitt, at 255-7935 for additional information. 3. Contractor shall cooperate with Cornell Police and/or other police authorities having jurisdiction, as follows: a. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction fence or the designated parking area. b. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc. c. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements. d. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area and the construction site. 4. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area all temporary trailers, rubbish, unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the Contractor's direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore. F. Changeovers and Continuity of Services 1. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part of the Work that would affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent areas services at approved times that will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before proceeding. 2. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased. 3. The Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during nornnal working hours at the Owner's discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of normal working hours, no extra payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses. 4. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing mechanical, electrical or telecommunication facilities or services without prior written approval of Owner's Representative. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-4 24 MARCH 2014 5. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the express permission of the Owner's Representative. Major shutdowns of utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns shall be defined as those affecting life safety or which are outside the project site limits. 6. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more than twenty-four (24) hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca Fire Department. All shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests shall be submitted in writing to the Owner's Representative. 7. IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY. G. Obstacles, Interference and Coordination General a. Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS. b. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fitting, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment locations, etc., after notification to the Owner's Representative and Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. c. Obtain written approval for all major changes before installing. If requested, submit at least five (5) copies of drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes. 2. Interference a. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with removal of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent attention. b. H. Supports The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all required supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases, braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-5 24 MARCH 2014 I. Existing Equipment, Materials, Fixtures, Etc. 1. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit complete list to Owner. Carefully remove and salvage all items that Owner wishes to retain shall be delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed from site and legally disposed of. J. Examination of Premises, Drawings, Etc. 1. Before Submitting Proposal a. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades to determine scope and relation to other work. b. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by visiting site and/or building. c. Ascertain access to site, available storage and delivery facilities. 2. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area a. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building. b. hlspect all adjacent work. 3. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement a. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying Drawings. b. No consideration, additional monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged misunderstanding. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 11 00*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-6 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 21 00 Ithaca, New York ALLOWANCES 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. This Section describes Allowances to be carried in the Base Bid by the Contractor. B. The Specification Section containing the pertinent requirements of materials and methods to achieve the Work described herein. Selected materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. Definition: An allowance is an amount determined by the Owner or calculated by the Contractor based on given quantities and stated on the Bid Form. B. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted alternate is complete and fully integrated into the Project. C. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work -in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or the Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead and profit. Submit claims within twenty-one (21) days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. The Owner will reject claims submitted later than twenty-one (21) days after such authorization. D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Allowances" is included at the end of this Section. Included as part of each allowance are miscellaneous devices, accessory objects or similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as pail of the allowance. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY ALLOWANCES 01 21 00-1 24 MARCH 2014 1.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. ALLOWANCE NO. 1: Provide four (4) Indiana Limestone ASTM C568 Cat II jamb trim stones (quoins). Match existing trim profile. Trim height to be as indicated on drawings. Color to match existing. Finish - smooth. Pick-up or field measure/profile existing trim. Deliver new pieces. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 21 00*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY ALLOWANCES 01 21 00-2 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL Ithaca, New York 1.1 GENERAL SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and conditions for substitutions stated in this Section. 1.2 PRODUCTS LIST A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a complete list of products which are proposed for installation. B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number. C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product: 1. Name and address of the manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation. 4. Manufacturer's data: a. Reference standards. b. Performance test data. 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of products and manufacturers named. C. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Such substitution shall have been listed on Bid Form as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will be allowed. D. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Form as provided in the Instructions to Bidders. 1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit a separate request for each substitution in triplicate. Support each request with: 1. Completed "Data for Evaluation of Materials, Products, and Systems" in an approved format. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-1 24 MARCH 2014 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: 1) Product description. 2) Reference standards. 3) Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and the date of each installation. 3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing any variations. 4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule. 5. Designate availability of maintenance. services, and source ofreplacement materials. B. Substitutions shall not result in additions to the Contract Sum. C. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from the Contractor. 2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier. 3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. D. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner. E. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed substitution. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that: 1. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAYSUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-2 24 MARCH 20]4 3. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 4. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 1.6 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the Contractor of the decision for acceptance or rejection of the request for substitution. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 25 00*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAYSUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01 25 00-3 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Owner will schedule and administer pre -construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting. a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. c. To the Architect. B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 1.2 PRE -CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule at least three (3) days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's Representatives 2. Architect and its professional consultants 3. Major Subcontractors 4. Major suppliers 5. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 24 MARCH 2014 D. Minimum Agendum: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers b. Projected Construction Schedules 2. Critical work sequencing 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities 4. Project Coordination a. Designation of responsible personnel 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions b. Proposal requests c. Submittals d. Change Orders e. Applications for Payment f. Requests for Information g. Daily Reports 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents 8. Use of premises: a. Office, work and storage areas b. Owner's requirements c. Job site personnel conduct d. Building access and security 9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction aids 10. Temporary utilities WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2 24 MARCH 2014 11. Safety and first-aid procedures a. Site specific safety plan 12. Security procedures 13. Housekeeping procedures 14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks throughout the Construction period. B. Attendance: 1. Architect 2. Architect's professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed 3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent 4. Owner's Representatives 5. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda 6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda 7. Safety Representative C. Minimum Agendum: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting 2, Review percentage of work to be in place by next meeting by individual trades. 3. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts. 5� Problems which impede Construction Schedule. 6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 8. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 9. Planned progress and schedule, during succeeding work period. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3 24 MARCH 2014 10. Coordination of schedules 11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 12. Maintenance of quality standards 13. Review status of all issued proposal requests and change orders. 14. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project. 15. Other business D. All decisions, instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 19*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-4 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days after award of the Contract, prepare and submit to the Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with sub -schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work. B. Conferences will be held with the Architect, Owner and Contractor at the start of the project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed. C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when requested to do so by Owner. D. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including updates, as well as all back-up to the submitted schedules. 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation. 2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week. 3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations and future revisions. B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work. C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers. 1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Construction Progress Schedule: 1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of each major element of construction including, but not limited to: • Mobilization/Site Controls • Limestone Templating • Selective Demolition (all except masonry and concrete) • Shoring ® Selective Demolition — Masonry and Concrete • Masonry Mockups • Structural Steel ® Limestone Delivery • Stone Masonry Restoration/Concrete • Demo and Rough -in — Fire Protection, HVAC, Electrical • Carpentry Rough • Carpentry Finish WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-1 24 MARCH 2014 • Doors • Hardware ® Leaded Glass ® Wrought Iron m Gypsum Drywall Soffit/Acoustical Ceilings ® Painting • Trim — Fire Protection, HVAC, Electrical • Punchlist B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the Architect and agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based on the understanding that minimum turn -around time in the Architect's office is five (5) working days. Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review. Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in processing. Show: 1. The dates for Contractor's submittals. 2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect. 3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the Project's construction schedule. 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submission. B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: 1. Major changes in scope 2. Activities modified since previous submission 3. Revised projections of progress and completion 4. Other identifiable changes C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: L Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. 2. Corrective action recommended, and its effect. 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-2 24 MARCH 2014 1.5 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within ten (10) calendar days after award of Contract. 1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within three (3) days after receipt. 2. If required, resubmit within two (2) days after return of review copy. B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment. C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (10) calendar days after date of commencement of work. D. Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. 1.6 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to: 1. Job site file 2. Subcontractors 3. Other concerned parties B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections of the schedule. 1.7 RESTRICTED WORK DATES Strict and effective enforcement by Contractor's management and super vision of the following dates and hours is required. There are no stand down or restricted work dates for this project. Note: Normal work hours are: Monday — Thursday 6:00 AM. — 4:30 PM Friday 6:00 AM — 2:30 PM Saturday 6:00 AM — 12:00 PM This means that Contractor shall not permit any noise generating activities that could disturb building occupants. or others to take place outside of these hours. Should any conditions necessitate work to extend beyond these hours, Contractor may submit a detailed written request with reasonable advance notice to Owner. Owner, at its sole discretion may issue a written relaxation of the above but Contractor is advised never to assume that it will be granted. Noisy construction activities such as sawing, grinding, hammering, drilling, chiseling, etc. shall be conducted during normal work hours at times that will limit their impact WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-3 24 MARCH 2014 to building occupants. Acceptable times for performing these operations shall be coordinated with the Owner. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION O1 32 16*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01 32 16-4 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 32 33 Ithaca, New York PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide existing condition photographs taken before commence of Work, progress photographs taken periodically during progress of the Work, and final photographs upon completion. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. During- the progress of the Work and until completion of construction, Contractor shall provide weekly, digital photographs in electronic format, for each of eight to ten different vantage points as defined by the Owner and Architect. The Contractor shall submit all photographs in electronic format to the Owner, no hard copies are required. B, Each digital photograph shall be dated, numbered using the vantage point key, and identified by project title. C. The Contractor shall compile all photographs sent to the Owner throughout the Work in CD format and submit to the Owner prior to final payment. ***END OF SECTION 01 32 33*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33-1 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.1 GENERAL A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples 4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals B. Designate in the construction schedule, or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples will be needed. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled draftsmen and presented in a clear and thorough manner. 1. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents. 7 Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings. 3. Standard information prepared without specific reference to Project is not Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8 '/z by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 24 MARCH 2014 7. Submittal: Submit one (1) correctable, translucent, reproducible print and three (3) blue or black line print for Architect's review. Architect will return reproducible print and one (1) blue or black line print. Maintain returned print as a "Record Document". 1.3 PRODUCT DATA A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials and equipment. B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. 1. Clearly mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. 5. Where printed Product Data includes information on products that are not required, eliminate or mark through information that does not apply. 6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. 7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where selection of options by Architect is required. 8. Submittals: Submit four (4) sets of Product Data for Architect's review. Architect will return two (2) copies. Maintain one (1) copy as a "Record Document". 1.4 SAMPLES A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color, texture and pattern. C. Field samples and mock-ups: 1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect. 2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2 24 MARCH 2014 3. Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished. 4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect. 5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the areas original condition. D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed. 1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. 2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer. 3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. 4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that show approximate limits of variations. 5. Submittals: Submit two (2) sets for Architect's review. Architect will return at least one (1) set marked with action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance and quality control submittals include design data, test reports, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, and manufacturer's field reports. B. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents. C. Manufacturer's instruction: Preprinted instructions concerning proper application or installation of system or product. D. Manufacturer's field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by manufacturer's field representative to verify compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions. E. Submittals: Submit not less than two (2) copies to Architect. Maintain one (1) additional copy as "Record Document". 1.6 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals for compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to transmitting to the Architect. B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-3 24 MARCH 2014 C. Contractor's approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact Documents. D. Contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Compliance with the Contract Documents 2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions 3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction. 4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades. 5. Performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. 6. Compliance with the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. All other provisions of the agreements. E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals is not to be construed as an authorization for additional work or additional cost. F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change in accordance with procedures specified before proceeding with the work. G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval of colors. Make all color -related submittals at one time. H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work. 1. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled. J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of inadvertent review of unspecified submittals. K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4 24 MARCH 2014 1.7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination 1. Coordinate submittals with performance of construction activities. 2, Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed to by all entities involved. 4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 5. Architect's Review: Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of each submittal requiring the Architect's review and response, except for longer periods required as noted below, and where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Allowing ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Advise the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical to the progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be foreshortened. 6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review. 7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal. 8. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing. 9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject to delays in processing by the Architect. 10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals Schedule. 11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval of Shop Drawings shall render all work thereafter performed to be at Contractor's sole risk, cost and expense. B. Submittal Preparation 1. Place permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5 24 MARCH 2014 3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents. 4. Include following information on label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name and number. b. Date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions. c. Contract identification. d. Name of Architect. e. Name and address of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. Name of manufacturer. h. Name of supplier. J. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as appropriate to clearly identify intended use of product. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. k. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. 1. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. in. A blank space for the Architect's stamps. 5. Identification of revisions on re -submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on previous submittals. 6. Shop drawings with the comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor. C. Submittal Transmittal 1. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. 2. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. 3. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 24 MARCH 2014 4. Transmit submittals to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed. 5. Where noted or directed, transmit submittals to Architect's consultant and forward copy of transmittal form to Architect. 1.8 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections or changes noted on previous submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal. hrdicate any changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect. C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 1.9 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review submittals with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this Section. B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp mean the following: 1. "No Exception" indicates that no deviations from the design concept have been found and Work may proceed. 2. "Make Corrections Noted" indicates that deviations from the design concept which have been found are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly. 3. "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected" indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect's notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. C. Informational Submittals: Submittals for information or record purposes, including Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect. 1. Architect will forward informational submittals without action. 2. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with Contract Documents. D. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete submittals without action. E. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without action. F. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or for resubmission. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-7 24 MARCH 2014 1.10 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute reproductions of reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data to: 1. Job site file 2. Record Documents file 3. Subcontractors 4. Installers 5. Suppliers 6. Manufacturers 7. Fabricators 8. Architect 9. Owner B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of submittals in connection with construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 33 00*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-8 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL Ithaca, New York 1.1 GENERAL SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub -contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. 1.2 CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY PLAN A. The Contractor will submit a site Safety Plan for review by Cornell University before commencement of work on the site. The safety plan should address site specific safety concerns related directly to the Work being done. The following safety plan review checklist is provided to assist contractors in tailoring their safety plan to the Work. Safety plans that inadequately address safe operations and equipment will be returned for resubmission. Failure to submit an appropriate site safety plan may result in denial of the payment. 1.3 ASBESTOS AND LEAD A. Attached for the Contractor's information are asbestos reports which represent samples taken within the building. B. Removal and disposal of material containing asbestos shall be performed by the Owner under separate contract prior to the start of construction. C. Building may contain lead based paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the presence of lead based paint, and must concurrently protect its workers based on the Contractor's means and/or methods. Lead was a common ingredient in paint until 1978. Willard Straight Hall was constructed in 1925. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that the protective measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 "Lead in Construction Standards". This site specific plan should address the particular methods the Contractor intends to protect its workers, the building occupants and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead based paint. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-1 24 MARCH 2014 1.4 SITE VISITS A. The undertaking of periodic Site Visits by Architects and/or Engineers or Owner shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of all persons; or make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them responsible for safety programs and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — PART 3 — EXECUTION NOT USED — NOT USED WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-2 24 MARCH 2014 Job Specific Safety Manual Checklist Jobsite Name: Job No: General Contractor: Jobsite Location: Subcontractor: Scope of Work: Prime Contractor: Completed by: Shops: Date: Standard Applies to this Contractor? Y/N Designated Competent Person (employee name) Subpart C - General Provisions 1926.20 - .35 Subpart D - Occupational Health & Environmental. Controls 1926.50 - .66 Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts, Mists 1926.55 Lead 1926.62 Subpart E - Personal Protective Equipment 1926.95 - .107 Subpart F — Fire Protection & Prevention 1926.150 - .159 Subpart G — Signs, Signals and Barricades 1926.200 - .203 Subpart H — Materials Handling, Storage, Use & Disposal 1926.250 - .252 Subpart I — Tools — Hand & Power 1926.300 - .307 Subpart J — Welding & Cutting 1926.350 - .354 WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-3 24 MARCH 2014 Standard Applies to this Contractor? Y/N Designated Competent Person (employee name Subpart K — Electrical 1926.400 - .449 Subpart L — Scaffolds 1926.450 - .454 Subpart M — Fall Protection 1926.500 - .503 Subpart N — Cranes, Derricks, Hoists, Elevators, & Conveyors 1926.550 - .556 Subpart P — Excavations 1926.650 - .652 Subpart Q — Concrete & Masonry Construction 1926.700 - .706 Subpart R — Steel Erection 1926.750 - .761 Subpart S — Tunnels, Shafts, Caissons, Cofferdams, & Compressed Air 1926.800 - .804 Subpart T — Demolition 1926.850 - .860 Subpart U — Blasting & Use of Explosives 1926.900 - .914 Subpart V — Power Transmission & Distribution 1926.950 - .960 Subpart X — Stairways & Ladders 1926.1050 - .1060 Subpart Y — Commercial Diving Operations 1926.1071 — 1090 Recordkeeping — 1926.1091 - .1092 Subpart Z — Toxic and Hazardous Substances 1926.1100 - .1152 ***END OF SECTION 01 35 29*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-4 24 MARCH 2014 Cornell University Pre -Renovation Asbestos Survey Report Performed at Willard Straight Hall Building 2020 For the Rooms 302/302A Renovation Project Ithaca, New York Campus Prepared for: Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Asbestos Project Coordinator Cornell University Maintenance Management 116 Humphreys Service Building, Ithaca, NY 14853 t DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607-231-6600 Fax: 607-231-6640 www.deltaengineers.com Delta Project No. 2013.044.372 Cornell Work Order No. 6696245 Field work performed by: Robert Mosher & Stephen Prislupsky, January 14th/15th, 2014 Report reviewed by: Stephen Prislupsky ADELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 860 Hooper Road snuwon.wv1oroo Tel: 607.231a*00 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION 3 5 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES AND METHODS 3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS 4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS Appendix A, ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE REPORT FORM Appendix B, LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS Appendix 0, DELTA ENGINEERS, COMPANY AND PERSONNEL CERTIFICATIONS Appendix D, LABORATORY CERTIFICATIONS Appendix E, BULK SAMPLE L00ATI0N DRAWING 2 ADELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 1.0 INTRODUCTION: 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors (Delta) was contracted by Cornell University, to provide a Pre -Renovation Asbestos Survey at Willard Straight Hall (Building 2020), located on the Cornell Ithaca, New York Campus. The survey was performed in support of the upcoming Rooms 302 and 302A Renovation Project and addressed suspect materials with the potential to be impacted by the Renovation Work. On January 14th and January 15th.2014'DeK@Certified|nSpaotonaRobertK4O8her8ndStCphen Prislupsky were on site to perform sampling of suspect materials. Based on a review of the Renovation Pject Scope and a visual inspection of the renovation areas, a total of twenty-one (21) bulk samples were collected representing ten (10) separate suspect homogenous building materials. Ten (10) of the samples collected were non -friable organically bound (NOB) representing five (5) homogenous materials. The remaining eleven (11) samples were "Non -NOB" materials representing five (5) homogenous materials. The homogenous materials identified and sampled included: Homogenous Area (HA) Building Material 01 1' x 1' Heavy Textured Ceiling Tile (Original) 02 1'x 1' Replacement Ceiling Tile 03 Sheetrock 04 Joint Compound 05 Wall Covering 06 West Face Window Glazing Compound 07 East Face Window Glazing Compound 08 Window Caulk 09 Hard Wood Floor Vapor Barrier 10 Wall Skim Coating Specific information required by 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1, (f) — "Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information" to be included in this pre -renovation report is as follows: 1) Building Name/Address: Willard Straight Hall 2020 East Avenue Ithaca, NY 2) Owner's Name/Address: Cornell University Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, NY14853 3) Owner's Agent: Mr. Dale Houseknecht 4) Survey Performed By: Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 3 ADELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 5) Certified Inspectors: 6) Date of Survey: Robert Mosher Certificate No. 06-05489 January 14th & 15th, 2014 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Stephen Prislupsky Certificate No. 90-10891 7) Laboratory: America Science Team New York, Inc. 117 East 30th Street, New York, NY 10016 4 A D ELTA ndwell 860 Hooper Road 13760 Tel 607 231.6600 ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS Fax: 607231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES AND METHODS: 2.1 Survey requirements Requirements to perform Pre-Demolition/Pre-Renovation Asbestos Surveys are based on the following State and Federal Regulations. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): OSHA survey requirements and sampling protocols are included in 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)(2) & (j)(8) and 29 CFR Part 1926.1101(k),(5): 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)(2), Installed Asbestos Containing Material: Employers and building owners are required to treat installed TSI and sprayed on and troweled -on surfacing materials as ACM in buildings constructed no later than 1980 for purposes of this standard. These materials are designated 'presumed ACM or PACM", and are defined in paragraph (b) of this section. Asphalt and vinyl flooring material installed no later than 1980 also must be treated as asbestos -containing. The employer or building owner may demonstrate that PACM and flooring material do not contain asbestos by complying with paragraph 0)(8)(111) of this section. 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)(8), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM: 1910.1001(j)(8)(1) - At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard, that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (/)(8)(ii) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis supporting the determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (m) of this section. 1910.1001 J)(8)01) - An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain asbestos by the following: 1910.1001(j)(8)(ii)(A) - Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements ofAHERA (40 CFR 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates that no ACM is present in the material; or 1910.1001(D(8)(i0(B) - Performing tests of the materia! containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an equivalent nationally -recognized round robin testing program. 1910.1001(/)(8)(11!) -The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM. 29 CFR Part 1926.1101(k)(5), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM: 1926.1101 (k)(5)0) - At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard, that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (k)(5)(11) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis supporting the determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (n) of this section. 1926.1101(k)(5)(ii) — An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain more than 1 percent asbestos by the following: 1926.1101(k)(5)0i)(A) - Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements of AHERA (40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates that the material is not ACM; or 5 ADELTA 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, E. LAPD SURVEYORS Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 1926.1101(k)(5)(11)(B) - Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or by a CiH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an equivalent nationally -recognized round robin testing program. 1926.1101(k)(5)(iio - The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM. EPA National Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPs): (NESHAPs) regulates asbestos under "40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M - National Emission Standard for Asbestos". Subpart M regulates demolition and/or renovation of "facilities" that may contain asbestos -containing materials (ACMs). "Facilities," as defined by NESHAPs, includes any institutional, commercial, public, industrial, or residential structure or building, except residential buildings having four or fewer units. ACMs are defined in NESHAPs as materials containing more than 1 percent asbestos. Section 61.145 states: 61.145 Standard for demolition and renovation. (a) Applicability. To determine which requirements of paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section apply to the owner or operator of a demolition or renovation activity and prior to the commencement of the demolition or renovation, thoroughly inspect the affected facility or part of the facility where the demolition or renovation operation will occur for the presence of asbestos, including Category I and Category 11 nonfriable ACM. It should be noted that 40 CFR Part 1 Subpart M, NESHAPS has no cut-off date exempting survey requirements. New York State Department of Labor (NYS DOL): Guidelines followed for the inspection are those established by the NYS DOL's Industrial Code Rule 56 (Cited as 12 NYCRR Part 56, as amended, adopted January 11, 2006; effective September 5, 2006). The specific survey, sampling and reporting requirements included in 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1(e) — "Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Requirements" include: 56-5.1 Asbestos Survey Requirements for Building/Structure Demolition, Renovation, Remodeling and Repair (a) Asbestos Survey Required. An owner or an owner's agent, except the owner of one and two- family dwellings who contracts for, but does not direct or control the work, shall cause to be conducted, an asbestos survey completed by a licensed asbestos contractor using inspectors certified in compliance with Section 56-3.2(d), to determine whether or not the building or structure, or portion(s) thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have repair work, contains ACM, PACM or asbestos material. This asbestos survey shall be completed and submitted as indicated in Subdivision (g) of this Section, prior to commencing work. All such asbestos surveys shall be conducted in conformance with the requirements of Subdivision (e) of this Section. 6 ADELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com (b) Exemptions To Asbestos Survey Requirements: The asbestos survey required by this Subdivision (a) of this Section shall not be required for the following classes of buildings or structures: (1) an agricultural building; (2) buildings or structures for which original construction commenced on or after January 1, 1974; (3) A structure certified in writing to be structurally unsound by a licensed Professional Engineer, Registered Architect, Building Inspector, Fire Inspector or other official of competent jurisdiction. (See Section 56-11.5) (c) Building/Structure Demolition. If a building/structure asbestos survey is not required or performed per Subdivision (b) of this Section, and the building/structure is certified to be unsound or slated for contracted demolition, the building/structure shall be assumed to contain asbestos, and shall be demolished per this Part, unless the building/structure is adequately certified to be free of asbestos containing material. Acceptable documentation for certification shall be a previous thorough building/structure asbestos survey, abatement records or other documentation acceptable to the Commissioner or his or her representative. (d) Responsibility To Comply. No exemption to the requirement to conduct an asbestos survey shall exempt any person, asbestos contractor, property owner or business entity from the inspection or asbestos survey requirements of EPA, OSHA, and any other applicable section of this Part. (e) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Requirements. The asbestos survey shall include a thorough inspection for and identification of all PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, or asbestos material throughout the building/structure or portion thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or to have repair work. The required inspection shall be performed by a certified asbestos inspector, and, at a minimum, shall include identification of PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material by all of the following methods: (1) The review of building/structure plans and records, if available, for references to asbestos, ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material used in construction, renovation or repair; and (2) A visual inspection for PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM throughout the building/structure or portion thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or repaired. For the purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM visually assessed shall be treated and handled as ACM and shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk sampling is conducted as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multi -layered systems sampling protocols; the subsequent analyses are performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both ELAP and federal requirements, including multi -layered sample analyses, to document non -asbestos containing material. (f) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information. (1) The asbestos survey shall, at a minimum, identify and assess with due diligence, the -locations, quantities, friability and conditions of all types of installations at the affected portion of the building/structure relative to the ACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, PACM or asbestos material contained therein. The following list is not inclusive of all types of AGMs, it only summarizes typical 7 Il DELTA 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS Fax 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com ACMs. The certified asbestos inspector is responsible for identification and assessment of all types ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM and asbestos material within the affected portion of the building/structure: PACM (i) Surfacing Treatments: (a) Fireproofing; (b) Acoustical Plaster; (c) Finish Plasters; and (d) Skim Coats of Joint Compound. (ii) Thermal System Insulation: (a) Equipment Insulation; (b) Boiler, Breeching, Boiler Rope, Duct, or Tank Insulation, Cement or Mortar Used for Boilers and Refractory Brick; (c) Piping and Fitting Insulations including but not limited to, Wrapped Paper, Aircell, Millboard, Rope, Cork, Preformed Plaster, Job Molded Plaster and coverings over fibrous glass insulation. SUSPECT MISCELLANEOUS ACM (i) Roofing and Siding Miscellaneous Materials: (a) Insulation Board; (b) Vapor Barriers; (c) Coatings; (d) Non -Metallic or Non -Wood Roof Decking (e) Felts; (f) Cementitious Board (Transite); (g) Flashing; (h) Shingles; and (1) Galbestos. (ii) Other Miscellaneous Materials: (a) Dust and Debris; (b) Floor Tile; (c) Cove Base; (d) Floor Leveler Compound; (e) Ceiling Tile; (f) Vermiculite Insulation (g) Gaskets, Seals, Sealants (including for condensate control); (h) Vibration Isolators; (/) Laboratory Tables and Hoods; (1) Chalkboards; (k) Pipe Penetration Packing or Other Firestopping Materials (1) Cementitious Board; (m) Electrical Wire Insulation; (n) Fire Curtains; (o) Fire Blankets; (p) Fire Doors; (q) Brakes and Clutches; (r) Mastics, Adhesives and Glues; 8 .DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS (s) Caulks; (t) Sheet Flooring (Linoleum); (u) Wallpaper; (v) Drywall; (w) Plasterboard (x) Spackling/Joint Compound; (y) Textured Paint; (z) Grout; (aa) Glazing Compound; and (ab) Terrazzo. 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com (2) All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, or asbestos material reported under Paragraph (1) of this Subdivision shall include the location of the materials, an estimate of the quantities, types, friability and condition of the identified materials to be treated and handled as ACM. For the purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM visually assessed shall be treated and handled as ACM and shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk sampling is conducted as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multilayered systems sampling protocols; the subsequent analyses are performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both ELAP and federal requirements, including multi -layered sample analyses, to document non -asbestos containing material. (3) The building/structure asbestos survey shall also include the building/structure name, address, the building/structure owner's name and address, the name and address of the owner's agent, the name of the firm performing the asbestos survey and a copy of the firm's current asbestos handling license, the names of the certified inspector(s) performing the survey and a copy of the current asbestos handling certificate for each inspector utilized, the dates of the asbestos survey, a listing of homogeneous areas identifying which ones are ACM, all laboratory analyses reports for bulk samples collected, and copies of the appropriate certifications for the laboratory used for analysis of samples taken during the asbestos survey. (g) Transmittal of Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information. One (1) copy of the results of the building/structure asbestos survey shall be immediately transmitted by the building/structure owner as follows: (1) One (1) copy of the completed asbestos survey shall be sent by the owner or their agent to the local government entity charged with issuing a permit for such demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work under applicable State or local laws. (2) The completed asbestos survey for controlled demolition (as per Subpart 56-11.5) or pre -demolition asbestos projects shall also be submitted to the appropriate Asbestos Control Bureau district office. (3) The completed asbestos survey shall be kept on the construction site with the asbestos notification and variance, if required, throughout the duration of the asbestos project and any associated demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project. (h) Removal Required. If the building/structure asbestos survey finds that the portion of the building/structure to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have repair work contains ACM, 9 ADELTA 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel 607 231.6600 ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS Fax: 607231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM, or asbestos material, which is impacted by the work, the owner or the owner's agent shall conduct, or cause to have conducted, asbestos removal performed by a licensed asbestos abatement contractor in conformance with all standards set forth in this Part. All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM, or asbestos material impacted by the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project shall be removed as per this Part, prior to access or disturbance by other uncertified trades or personnel. No demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work shall be commenced by any owner or the owner's agent prior to the completion of the asbestos abatement in accordance with the notification requirements of this Part. For multi -phased work, the access restriction for uncertified trades or personnel applies to each intermediate portion of the entire project. Upon completion of the intermediate portion of the asbestos project, other trades or personnel may access that portion of the work site. For demolition projects that are exempt from asbestos survey requirements due to being structurally unsound, the demolition is considered an asbestos project and shall proceed as per Section 56-11.5. (1) All building/structure owners and asbestos abatement contractors on a demolition, renovation, remodeling, or repair project, which includes work covered by this Part, shall inform all trades on the work site about PACM, ACM, asbestos material and suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM at the work site. (i) Bidding. Bids may be advertised and contracts awarded for demolition, remodeling, renovation, or repair work, but no work on the current intermediate portion of the project shall commence on the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work by any owner or agent prior to completion of all necessary asbestos abatement work for the current intermediate portion of the entire project, in conformance with all standards set forth in this Part. (j) Unidentified and Unassessed Asbestos. When any construction activity, such as demolition, remodeling, renovation or repair work, reveals PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM that has not been identified by the asbestos survey per this Part, or has not been identified by other inspections as per current OSHA or EPA requirements, all activities shall cease in the area where the PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM is found and the Asbestos Control Bureau shall be notified by telephone by the building/structure owner or their representative, followed with a written notice in accordance with the notification requirements of this Part. Unassessed PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM shall be treated and handled as ACM and assumed to be ACM, unless proven otherwise by standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multi -layered systems sampling protocols; subsequent analyses performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both NYS ELAP and federal requirements, including multi -layered sample analyses, to document non -asbestos containing material. 2.2 Sample Analysis Bulk sample analysis was performed by American Science Team New York Inc., an independent laboratory approved/accredited by the NYS Department of Health (ELAP), the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), and the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). 10 ADELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.e650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Samples collected during the course of this survey fell into one of two categories. The first category includes non -friable organically bound (NOB) materials. These materials are those which have an organic binder in their matrix and include items such as floor tiles, sheet flooring, mastics, glazings, caulks and roofing materials. The second category includes non -NOB "friable" materials including parging, sheetrock, joint compound, wall insulations, and wallboard. Analysis of all "NOB" materials was initially performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) following the New York State Department of Health ELAP 198.0 Gravimetric Reduction Methodology. If a given sample was reported as non -asbestos following this analysis, it was then analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) foliowing the NYS DOH ELAP 198.4 Methodology. 2.3 Materials not sampled There were several materials present at the site which were not considered "suspect" by the inspector and were not sampled. These included various fiberglass, foam, ViDy|. silicone, wood/cellulose products and concrete/cinder block/brick components. 11 ADELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, E. LAND SURVEYORS 3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 3.1) Willard Straight Hall Rooms 302/302A Renovation Project Pre -Renovation Asbestos Survey, Non -Asbestos Materials - Based on results reported for samples collected during this Survey of suspect materials present in Rooms 302 & 302A at Willard Straight Hall with the potential to be impacted by the Project, the following materials were identified as non -asbestos: Homogenous Area (HA) Non -Asbestos Material 01 1' x 1' Heavy Textured Ceiling Tile (Original) 02 1' x 1' Replacement Ceiling Tile 03 Sheetrock 04 Joint Compound 05 Wall Covering 06 West Face Window Glazing Compound 07 East Face Window Glazing Compound 08 Window Caulk 09 Hard Wood Floor Vapor Barrier 10 Wall Skim Coating 3.2) Willard Straight Hall Rooms 302/302A Renovation Project Pre -Renovation Asbestos Survey, Asbestos Containing Materials - Based on results reported for samples collected during this Survey of suspect materials present in Rooms 302 & 302A at Willard Straight Hall with the potential to be impacted by the Project, the following materials were identified as being Asbestos Containing: Homogenous Area (HA) Asbestos Containing Material 08 Window Caulk A breakdown of asbestos -containing materials by Homogeneous Area is as follows: A) Window Caulk, HA 08: This asbestos -containing caulk is applied along the perimeter frame of the window present in the wall between rooms 302A and 303. The total quantity of this ACM caulk is less than 1 square foot. 4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS This Pre -Renovation Asbestos Survey was limited to ONLY the rooms/spaces and associated accessible suspect materials present within the Rooms 302 & 302A renovation areas. Associated rooms, spaces and areas which were visible and accessible were inspected and sampled as a part of this survey. Inaccessible areas such as wall cavities, fixed/hard ceiling plenum spaces and enclosed pipe chases were not included as a part of this Survey. Any suspect materials present in areas not accessible or not included as a part of this Survey shall be assumed ACM when encountered, until tested. 12 ADELITA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & # D SURVEYORS APPENDIX A Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form 13 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com 6600 Fax 607.231.6640 NY 13760 Tel: 607.23 860 Hooper Road, Endw Delta Proj. No.: 2013.044.372 Asbestos Inspector: Ste Number of Samples Collected: 21 Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 20 / TEM - 10 Work Order No.: 6696245 Date Sampling Performed: 01/15/2014 Date of Report: 01/20/2014 Laboratory: AmeriSci > 0 .7J 0 0 E Project Asbestos Building Code: 2020 Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 ow CO C; 2013.044.372 - 0 z 0 z 0 z Room 302A1'x1'Replacement Tile CO 0 2013.044.372 - 0 z 0 z 0 z Room 302A. 1'x1' Replacement Tile CO 0 (0 2013.044.372 - z 0 z 0 z Room 302A, Sheetrock, Knee W CO Cc) 2013.044.372 - z 0 z 0 z Room 302A, Sheetrock CO CO 0 co CO 0 3013.044372 - z 0 z 0 z Room 302A, Joint Compound, Knee Wall Cc) 0 4- 2013.044.372 - z 0 z 0 z Room 302A, Joint Compound CO 2013.044.372 - z 0 z 0 z Room 302A South Wall Covering L() 0 2013.044.372 - z 0 z 0 z 2 0 0 03 (I) E ce) 0 (0 LO 2013.044.372 - N 03 (5 o 035 03 0 E 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 z E 0 0 2013.044.372 - 0 z 0 z 0 z (r) 'Fi ca 0 0 03 LL C z Cf) o E °- o E O 0 X 0 CO 0 2013.044.372 - 0 z 0 z 0 z 0) N co 0 0 03LL 03 uJ < c\I c o E (D- o E O 0 X C.) 2013.044372- 4- (1) 0) 03 0 6600 Fax 607.231.6640 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.23 .deltaengineers.com Delta Proj. No.: 2013.044.372 (/) Number of Samples Collected: 2 Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 20 / TEM - 10 Work Order No.: 6696245 Date Sampling Performed: 01/15/2014 Laboratory: AmeriSci ovation Project Asbestos Building Code: 2020 0 re 0 - CD a w 05 9— 0 0_ z 0 z 0 0 0 0 0 z 0 z 0 z 0 .i.5 co (1) 0 Room 302A Window Caulk CO 00 CO 0 2013.044372 - Room 302A Window Caulk CO 2013.044372 - Room 302A HW Floor Vapor Barrier (r) 0 0 2013.044.372 - Room 302A HW Floor Vapor Barrier 0 03 0 0 2013.044.372 - Room 302A, North Wall Skim Coating 0 2013.044.372 - Room 302A, North Wall Skim Coating co 0 2013.044.372 - Room 302A, North Wall Skim Coating 2013.044.372 - NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NO No Asbestos Detected HA - Homogenous Area Trace / < 1% - Non -asbestos by definition Misc - Miscellaneous Material TSI - Thermal System Insulation as ▪ -6 a) c 65 .2 co -2 c> 1) (,) E.) • co CO c 0 > D S = w w E o o o • C a. ADEL[A ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & © SURVEYORS APPENDIX B Laboratory Analytical Results 14 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Delta Engineers Attn: Stephen Prislupslw 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 AmeriSci New York 117 EAST 30TH ST. NEW YORK, NY 10016 TEL: (212) 679-8600 • FAX: (212) 679-3114 PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Date Received 01/16/14 eriSci Job # 214012454 Date Examined 01/16/14 P.O. # E • # 11480 Page 1 of 4 RE: 2013.044.372; Cornell University; Willard Straight Hall - Rooms 302 / 302A Renovation Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2013.044.372-01A 214012454-01 No NAD 01 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A - 1x1 Heavy Textured Tile Congruall (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 4.4 % 2013.044.372-01B 214012454-02 No NAD 01 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A - 1x1 Heavy Textured Tile Congruall (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 1.7 `)/0 2013.044.372-02A 214012454-03 No NAD 02 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A - 1x1 Replacement Tile (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 20.1 % 2013.044.372-02B 214012454-04 No NAD 02 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A - 1x1 Replacement Tile (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 25.4 % 2013.044.372-03A 214012454-05 No NAD 03 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A - Sheetrock Kneewall (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 1 %, Non-fibrous 99 % See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 214012454 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM _ Asbestos Report 2013.044.372; Cornell University; Willard Straight Hall - Rooms 302 / 302A Renovation Page 2 of 4 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total °/0 Asbestos 2013.044.372-036 214012454-06 03 Location: Floor 3, Room 302 - Sheetrock al Description: Brown/GreyHeterogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 50 %, Non-fibrous 50 % No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 2018.044.372-04A 214012454-07 04 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A - Joint Compound Kneewall Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 2013.044.372-04B 214012454-08 No NAD 04 Location: Floor 3.Room 3O2 - Joint Compound (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by David W. Rocierick on 01/16/14 Analyst Description: White, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 2013.044.372-05A 214012464-09 No NAD 05 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A South - Wall Coverng (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 Analyst Description: BeigeHomogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 50 %, Non-fibrous 50 % 2013.044372-05B 214012454-10 No NAD 05 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A South - Wall Covering (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 Analyst Description: Beige, Homogeneous, Fibrous, BuIk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Cellulose 50 %, Non-fibrous 50 % 2013.044.372-00A 214012454-11 No NAD 06 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A West Face - Window Glazing Compound (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 Analyst Description: OffWhite.Homogeneous, Non-Fibmuo.Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 23.2 % See Reporting notes on laspage AmeriSci Job #: 214012454 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk sbestos Report 2013.044.372| Cornell UnWilIard Straight Hall - Rooms 302 / 302A Renovation Page 3 of 4 Client No. / HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2013.044.372-06B 214012454-12 No NAD 06 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A West Face - Window Glazing Compound (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 Analyst Description: OffWhite, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 52.3 % 2013.044.372-07A 214012454-13 No NAD 07 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A East Face - Window Glazing Compound (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 61.9 % 2013.044.372-07B 214012454'14 No NAD 07 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A East Face - Window Glazing Compound (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 36.8 % 2013.044.372-00A 214012454-15 08 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A - Window Caulk Analyst Descrlption: Grey, Homogeneous,s, Non-Fibrou, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Chrysotile 6.5 % Other Material: Fibrous glass 596. Non-fibrous 14.3 % Yes 6.596 (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 2013.044.372-08B 214012454-16 08 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A - Window Caulk Anal Description: Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: NA/PS 2013.044.372-00A 214012454-17 09 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A HW Floor- Vapor Barrier Analyst Descriptlon: Black, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 1.4% No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 214012454 Client Name: Delta Engineers PLM Bulk Asbestos Report 2013.044.372; Cornell UniversityWiIlard Straight Hall - Rooms 302 / 302A Renovation Page 4 of 4 Client No.! HGA Lab No. Asbestos Present Total % Asbestos 2013.044.372-09B 214012454-18 No NAD 09 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A HW Floor - Vapor Barrier (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 Analyst Descrlption: Black, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 0.5 % 2013.044.372-10A 214012454-19 No NAD 10 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A North Wall - Skim Coating (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by David W. Rode,ick on 01/16/14 Analyst Descrlption: Grey,Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Cementitious, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 2013.044.372-10B 214012454-20 No NAD 10 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A North Wall - Skim Coating (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 ml Description: Grey, Homogannoun, Non'Fibmuo.CemundUouo Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % 2013.044.372-10C 214012454-21 10 Location: Floor 3, Room 302A North Wall - Skim Coating No NAD (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by David W. Roderick on 01/16/14 Analyst Description: Grey, Homogeneous, Non -Fibrous, Cementitious, Bulk Material Asbestos Types: Other Material: Non-fibrous 100 % Reporting Notes: Analyzed by: David W. Roderick *NAD/NSID =no asbestos detect ; NA =not analyzed; NA/PS=not analyzed/positive stop; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis by EPA 600/M4-82-020 per 40 CFR 763 (NVLAP Lab Code 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite or 198.6 for NOB samples or EPA 400 pt ct by EPA 600/M4-82-020 (NY ELAP Lab ID11480); Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non -friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM are inconclusive, TEM is currently the only method that can be used to deterrnine if this material can be considered or treated as non asbestos -containing in NY State (also see EPA Advisory for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,811/94) National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this reporl must not be reproduced except in full )Mthout the approval of the lab.Thls PLM report relates ONLY to the items tested. AIHA Lab # 102843, RI Reviewed By: END OF REPORT (11 >e .0 96 at en N— 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < CD Z z z z Z Z Z z Z Z z z z z Z Z CP CU AmeriSci Job #: 214012454 Client Name: Delta Engineers >, .0 DI" LO Co. V) 14 CD U) 2 CI 0 0 o 0 0 o o C) o a o o 0 0 0.. 0 2 < < < << < < < < < < < < < 4= o Z 61 2 2 2 2 Z 2 2 2 2 2 2 Z 2 2 . L s 2 Q ... 0 '41 Client Sample* 0) 0) co ('I trl 2013.044.372-0113 red Tile Congruall 0 co a) < < csi o co E 0 o ii C`i CNI 01- 6 O 8" 0 c 41) m 302A - 1x1 Replac • LI • E • „, o E o c a) a) 2 Er < 9 < 0.1 < CV I."- CV 0 01 0 c•) E 0E 8c 0 re E C6 Cs! C6 1- O 8 co cv c:1 r- 0 u_ u 0 I I I I 1 a) 2013.044.372-04B 0) 0 < o .5 1.0 0 0(/) o cr), o E E 8 oi 8 re E, re «i • 8 0) 2013.044.372-05B 0) 0 .0 0 co cv E8 8 cl (t) cri co 9 c‘c cv m 302A West Face - Window Glazing Compound re z; c6- ce 8 302A West Face - Window Glazing Compound 0. g 0 o co 0 0 0 40 CV co 8 8 2013.044.372-07A •0 o_ co E (0 0 n- '41". 0 0) 0 0 2013.044.372-07B 2013.044.372-08A 0 -co 0 EEEE 2 2 0 g g co co 41) 0 c., ... .0 "i5 cv a 0 0 u w< .t < < a) 0 Z z z z Z 0) .0 cu .0 ./ AmeriSci Job #: 214012454 Client Name: Delta Engineers .0 0 00 0 0 0 z z • z z z c .o...-7, o a) Ct < C•1 (f) 0 0 0• -Cs44 CC -9 V) c> 7 .0 C 'Lt LO O CO Ce CO CD , el c c 0 Cn E 0 c Cn 0 >1 CC ....-' . RS _ C To* < 1 64! N 'l .° ' co , •. 0• ..3 'E 0 0 ea (3• 0 J*I • C 1) U) co 8 c co Ja -P.- < (1/ = Y > M a) e 0 .., 0) I i 945 r 0 f, = = . 6...: 0 CD CU n E --e) E E = 0 E *cy E (J) ° c5 &F 1. -- re) el: et C:) of 0 cN 0. I 1 I Client Sample# cr) 2013.044.372-09A CD CD :0-3 t). . C C C ..=. E ca ..=, cact m CO as 0 8 n3 0 8 O E E E �0) o. 0 .2 o •2 0•2 u-) ,- 0) > > , = '5 8 ro to 75 o o LT_ L.T. .c .0 E C° .0 'C O CO 0 0 X C:) 2 Z Q Z z 9 < cN (R. g < cs., , C \ I g 0 0 0 0 00 o o C)-) c• E EEEE c? 0 8 • 3 8 8 ,--) 0 8 O O 8 _ 8 o 0 0 0 0 • LL. 0 8 0 E u) w I- 1 2 @ cp I-. 2 o co • - V., 8 >- 2To 'Z -el E co ti .2 43 co 0 co v - co 11 • 0 0 < co 0 0 •In 7°- ).- TD -0 OCOW Z "- * 11"' < D co 2 » .,- _a) ... c6 a. o• . co alto, W co co ° c o) 8 - co LD 0. -c) -1 2 o ...... co--• o co < co CD 0 • • )v -cal 2 Tiff' ena) 44. 2 -6 Jo ca o o 0 c c >- co co o z 11 ro -co' O .2 i, FT, — z < Fr ai • - iii 0, co .-- ',- O. 0. E c LIJ u) 0 2' › 6 0 = 00 0) D (.4 0Z Ca a) --. a) 7... 8 4- >. ‘-...... aw .a.- ri coc 0 co CD E t N Cs4 CD 2 < il" • . -) 7 Z Lu cr 2. o 0 ca > _.Cf). liiAl 22 om to > E Z E E c; 0 v .0 En • 8 ..... .0 2 co 2 < • — LL C c E c15 45 § 0.. ..Yea..S03 CD 0 a a u, < • S 17 fp- 3 c 0 0. 0 >, E cis ca 75 0 as E E c "6 a) a) • • u) 2..) 0. -a 0)9 co -u2 E CI) o C C cl) C0 4-4 D .0 LI! 55 .c o I- O .0 E co 0 -c) E> .c E 0 a) 18 E O c 30)E E E kr) c\t 6 0 12 o c .0.- 0= to' CD D > 7,- 75 > 0)0) -! M }-- c o O 0, e 0 '0 "8 -2 = E 2 0 0- a. (4 o p Z .c c E ca a) CO ADELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS 0 z 9- 0. a) Collected B •-•< Description / Sample Location L G tkA. 3 f".- ..-- c j ---', 3' , <''. '” -..._.,- .----- ,' '.L ........ ..2f•''''''‘' (-4 4 . ,---, 1...' fij (•:S) ,--,,t, '-... „.. . - 1.., t . *,1 C.1.4 ,• (..: Ve'n N (,.....)) .,..) d. • ..--j- :Pe •.... .t.)C '''. ff ! cc r‹. • () vo,'"- f--- ( . • . , . 'e":1C. "7-A ---- ) ,•••, „. <.. - . ^, ("7/ r? 02 --_>, .3 \-.5 '.4 • ;--, , 1 :1.1 ' ' co— * -- ° i-...4 .•-7'..' .e....,. -P fq - 6 ..•-•• ..'' - ,...) .3--- .''' ....!.‘ I --r; 1. . s..........) -- -,....--- , ,,.. .- ".Z. rx 4 - -4, ..o , C... '‘,.....) ‘ , - ,,......5 _...._ • ,,_ , ,... %.,....1 • , . o .-71 , • -..,,..' 'i •,..„ •-r '., 'C i 16' o ent 1.N.r, in .... c 47„; 12 es C 0 .? : ••• 4 1 .... j .— , ...:i . -4 .....k, c-'( k e.. ......k . d ---r • •-0 •1 ( 1 ,..0 , ---r, 1 1-4 4 • ......J4- ,..e Material Type sc ' ).?(.....1 --- - vs.n r ks.i) (--- . ‘J^7s1 c,. r.,,,, *:.- • ._ Sample Number etl(1 3 -2 - ADELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS APPENDIX C 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors Company and Personnel Certifications 15 tikk State rDeplrtntent-� a Division ofrS'ef qty dnd Health; License end Cetiiiicatetliift' State Cafnpus,' uildi g 12 Albany NY.,1 BESTOS HANDLING LICEN 11LE NUMBER: 05 451 LICENSE NUMBER 32 LICENSE CLASS:.RESTRICT DATE OF;ISSU.E: 08/08dQ1 EXPIRATION DATE: 09/30/0 Authorizedu epresentativ This ircese }res bi3:en issued in ace` plctne,with,p tip NowYork Mate. Codes, °Rules af<d egulattc3 seriou vrojatrott of'state, federal ox treat taws wail; re sj on rbility in thecconduct of any Jt b 3nvo1vrng I.'of the Labor Law of New Yor1 Sfai ect to susOnsion or revocation for a estos' proj t t, or (2) .demoirstrated 1 This{�aeert or the contractor nannec above an8 tits laCense ora pl�ofa opy,.inust befp oanFnently disptayod att> asbestos pi oiect wor srte This license veri;l=res that ali'persons employed by,The licensee on an'asbestos projer t to ew Yoxk _ State have been issued an Sbestos'Certificate, approprtat forfetype ofvtoic they perform, by thetew Yo Stat+ DepartQ t of Lsbor, s41een.M. Franko, Acting Director For the Commissioner of Labor STATE OF NEW Y ASBESTOS CERTIFICATE --el- J1R XP (01114) 'SP 47114 M Wnt* 1,Z1 cERI#ti omw 788844351 MUST DE CARRIED ON AIBESTM PR EYES RAZ HAIR BRO HGT 6' 00" IF FOUND RETURN TO: NYSDOL - L&C UNIT ROOM 161A BUILDING 12 STATE OFFICE CAMPUS ALBANY NY 12240 tX, EYES BRO HAIR BRO HOT 5' 06" STATE OF N a,# STEPHEN M PRISLUPSKY LASS(EXPIRES) C ATEC(11/14) D INSP(11/14) PM (11/14) 1 PD (11/14) 1111111 IIIIIIIIII IF FOUND RETURN TO: NYSDOL — L&C UNIT ROOM 161A BUILDING 12 STATE OFFICE CAMPUS ALBANY NY 12240 A DELTA ENGINEERS. ARCHITECTS, & EASE© SURVEYORS APPENDIX D Laboratory Certifications 16 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com Issued at l R, RifVl RJSF /1AR, AME1/CA SIC!= TEA TWICATE OF AFFROVAFt ORATORY SERVICE cordence with and pursuant to se on 602 Public Health, Law of New York St YORK INC eby A ?F ROVED as an En vlbe story dor ti;c catrcgory 1lfRO i -r 7AL ANALYSES SOLID A 1 {AZARi LI WASTE All approved subcategories ories and/or analyies:are, Us ed below: fsc if neon Asbe #c v fn Friabfe� EPA 6s7QI (4162/02 Asbestos; in Nan- t eble P ate al -f Asbestoo fn ton-Friabl P aterial-T June 11, 2013 Mr. Paul Mucha America Science TEAM New York, Inc. DBA: AmeriSci New York 117 E. 30th Street New York, NY 10016 Dear Mr. Mucha: UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE National Institute of Standards and Technology Gaithersburg, Maryland 20899 NVLAP Lab Code: 200546-0 am pleased to inform you that continuing accreditation for specific test methods in Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis (PLM) is granted to your organization under the National Voluntaiy Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). This accreditation is effective until June 30, 2014, provided that your organization continues to comply with accreditation requirements contained in the NVLAP Procedures. Your Certificate of Accreditation is enclosed along with a statement of your Scope of Accreditation. You may reproduce these documents in their entirety and announce your organization's accreditation status using the NVLAP symbol and/or teen in business publications, the trade press, and other business -oriented literature. Accreditation does not relieve your organization from observing and complying with any applicable existing laws and/or regulations. We are pleased to have you participate in NVLAP and look forward to your continued association with this program. If you have any questions concerning your NVLAP accreditation, please direct them to Hazel M. Richmond, Program Manager, Laboratory Accreditation Program, National Institute of Standards and Technology, 100 Bureau Dr. Stop 2140, Gaithersburg, MD 20899-2140; (301) 975-4016. Sincerely, Warren R. Merkel, Chief Laboratory Accreditation Program Enclosure(s) NIST/NVLAP • 100 Bureau Drive, Stop 2140 . Gaithersburg, MD 20899-2140 http://www,nist,govinvlap "ifissaingir National Voluntary. Laboratory Accreditation Program *% OT OF co <0. 4, SCOPE OF ACCREDITATION TO ISO/IEC 17025:2005 AmeriSci New York DBA: AmeriSci New York 117 E. 30th Street New York, NY 10016 Mr. Paul Mucha Phone: 212-679-8600 Fax: 212-679-2711 E -Mail: pmucha@amerisci.com URL: http://wwvv.amerisci.com * '71.11-rEsO BULK ASBESTOS FIBER ANALYSIS (PLM) NVLAP LAB CODE 200546-0 NVLAP Code Designation /Description 18/A01 EPA 600/M4-82-020: Interim Method for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Insulation Samples 18/A03 EPA 600/R-93/116: Method for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Building Materials 2013-07-01 through 2014-06-30 Page 1 of 1 Effective dates For the National Institute of Standards and Technology NVLAP-01S (REV. 2005-05-19) CODE: 200546-0 z specific services, cf) 9 ADELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS APPENDIX E Bulk Sample Location Drawing 17 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com o Y J 8 � N Ras jf u € 8 r l€ I f d � n A E z {f O O I�fNi{_ 2 tE' r� h 1 - 7 ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Q 14. p ❑ 0 ❑ p0 0 ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ n p a D 4 ❑ r g a #g ._, �I 0 ❑ 7 i 1�j('(l��pq�({(,�j��;L�.��, IIUWjitllIII�� 55 ti U •n n ' o o t :. CORNELL SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. This Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both Contractor and all tiers of sub -contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in writing to the Owner's Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 44 — Spill Control 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 — Submittals: 1.0 Waste Disposal Plan. 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION A. In accordance with Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site during all working hours. B. If at any time operations under the representative's supervision do not comply with this Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested by the Owner, said representative with another representative satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not comply with these specifications. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAYGENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-1 24 MARCH 2014 1.5 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Noise and vibration 1. Limit and control the nature and extent of activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by construction related equipment, to safe and tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local ordinances. Equip all construction equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise - muffling devices adequate to meet these requirements. 1.6 DUST CONTROL A. Take adequate measures for controlling dust. Dust control measures are required throughout the duration of construction. B. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, the Contractor is not adequately controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor's expense, employ alternative means to control dust. C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work for the protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA. 1.7 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to: 1. Dumping of spoil material or any liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified locations. 2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters. 3. Pumping of any silt -laden water from trenches or other excavations into any storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters. 4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAYGENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-2 24 MARCH 2014 5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property, unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or specifically approved by the Owner's site representative. 6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream. 7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials. B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work. C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local sewer authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary sewer. D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner's Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 — Spill Control Procedures. 1.8 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK A. Obtain approval from the Owner's Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re- routing plans to the Owner's Representative in writing. The following shall require approval of the Owner: 1. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections may impact air emissions. B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper with any existing valves, switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the Owner's Representative. 1.9 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS A. hnfornm officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith. B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAYGENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-3 24 MARCH 2014 C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties corning into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor's performance or failure to perform hereunder. D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal. 1.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit "Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan" to the Owner's Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. B. The "Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan" form, together with definitions associated with the form waste descriptions, is attached to this Section. Contractor must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations. C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 43*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAYGENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 01 35 43-4 24 MARCH 2014 ame/Number/Email: C,5z Contract No.: Project Name/Description: CU Project Manager: Project End Date: Project Start Date: Destination or Disposal Location Transporter osn-o-a Waste Management -,--1, v. Joioaquop la -h (...) spunoJD SHI oicluFAV SCISIA1 Source I 010 B.110 3 Tpluop palaupsa • Q.. . - C.) (ID 0 0 ... 'o 0 bk) 0 (74' (...) CO 0 C/D (I, (r) L) P.4 Asbestos Lead Mercury Chromium Other Toxic Metals (describe in section 4) Mold Light Bulbs - Thermostats Batteries Used Oil Contaminated PPE & Materials Other (describe in section 4) No hazardous waste Waste Material Disposa v U • O 11 be generated azardous wastes that v ri Estimated Quantity Transporter Facility Phone Facility Address Disposal Facility Name 0 ti Ct.' U U Clean soil Non C&D solid waste Other (describe in section IV) No non -hazardous waste will be generated 4. Further desc 5. Contractor Certification U O o cn O 0 o • c > 0 >, - 0— U to to a r 0 o V tj U r U ° U 'o 00 ^ � • U 0 cG '-i „ cn U U V O c� cs•� o . 0.. 0 U U 3 c„ r . to .c, — U a; Cu ,� o ti >0, 0 • o i .•-i ...5 +-' 41 U O :-, ry z. O N bA cC r r U >1 ,..0 nH '� rJJ +_, '-. 0 y ^ .'-)> 0 u �^ i� U4 U� 0 0 0 0 73 5 = 3 ,- >, O �-+ -4 c 0 o Ct CID • U co o 0 .z.:1v r,-. O r o A >✓ O v 7,--. r :.o U -o o — 3 0 ' U 0 c N v :L r.--1'0 o � c� O 0 .� r. r r.r. Fl 0 0p • 0 N � r r U 2 O -'> r o O yf� O • � O O U• • U = 8 N 3 CA ,� • .. U r r. U 0 U W Oa O o '70 '00 O o 3�' G o 0• 0 0 O 0 O Contractor Signature Definitions for Use with Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan: The following is not solid waste: Discarded materials that are being beneficially used pursuant to 6NYCRR Section 360-1.15 A material is disposed of if it is discharged, deposited, injected, dumped, spilled, leaked or placed into or on any land or water so that such material or any constituent thereof may enter the environment or be emitted into the air or discharged into groundwater or surface water. Asbestos: Any waste material containing the asbestiforn varieties of: Cluysotile (serpentine); crocidolite (riebeckite); amosite (cum- mingtonitegrunerite); anthophyllite; tremolite; and actinolite. Batteries: All spent batteries being disposed that are regulated by New York State Department of Environmental Conservation (NYDEC) in 6 New York Code of Rules and Regulations (NYCRR) Part 374-3, or Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in 40 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 273.2 as Universal Waste Batteries. Borrow Alaterial: Fill material required for on-site construction that is obtained from other locations. Chromium: Any waste containing chromium or contaminated with chromium that exceeds the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for chromium as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24. Clean Soil: Soil that is uncontaminated with any solid or hazardous waste, C&DDebris, trees, stumps, yard waste or wood chips per definitions of those terms below. Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris: Uncontaminated solid waste resulting from the construction, remodeling, repair and demolition of utilities, structures and roads; and uncontaminated solid waste resulting from land clearing. Such waste includes, but is not limited to bricks, concrete and other masonry materials, soil, rock, wood (including painted, treated and coated wood and wood products), land clearing debris, wall coverings, plaster, drywall, plumbing fixtures, non -asbestos insulation, roofing shingles and other roof coverings, asphaltic pavement, glass, plastics that are not sealed in a manner that conceals other wastes, empty buckets ten gallons or less in size and having no more than one inch of residue remaining on the bottom, electrical wiring and components containing no hazardous liquids, and pipe and metals that are incidental to any of the above. Solid waste that is not C&D debris (even if resulting from the construction, remodeling, repair and demolition of utilities, structures and roads and land clearing) includes, but is not limited to asbestos waste, garbage, corrugated container board, electrical fixtures containing hazardous liquids such as fluorescent light ballasts or transformers, fluorescent lights, carpeting, furniture, appliances, tires, drums, containers greater than ten gallons in size, any containers having more than one inch of residue remaining on the bottom and fuel tanks. Specifically excluded from the definition of construction and demolition debris is solid waste (including what otherwise would be construction and demolition debris) resulting from any processing technique, other than that employed at a department -approved C&D debris processing facility, that renders individual waste components unrecognizable, such as pulverizing or shredding. Also, waste contained in an illegal disposal site may be considered C&D debris if the department determines that such waste is similar in nature and content to C&D debris. Construction and Demolition Debris Processing Facility means a processing facility that receives and processes construction and demolition debris by any means. Contaminated PPE & Materials: Any personal protective equipment such as gloves, coveralls, boot covers, respirator cartridges etc.; or rags, tools, articles or other material that has become adulterated by a hazardous material, and which meets the definition of hazardous waste or is considered unsuitable for disposal as regular trash. Exempt C&D and Stump Facilities: The following facilities are exempt from Solid waste management facility permitting requirements provided the facilities operate only between the hours of sunrise and sunset, and (if the allowable waste comes from an off-site source) no fee or other form of consideration is required for the privilege of using the facility for disposal purposes: (i) A site at which only the following C&D debris is placed: recognizable uncontaminated concrete and concrete products (including steel or fiberglass reinforcing rods that are embedded in the concrete), asphalt pavement, brick, glass, soil and rock. (Recognizable means solid waste that can be readily identified cis C&D debris by visual observation.) (ii) A landfill for the disposal of trees, stumps, yard waste and wood chips generated from these materials is exempt when origin and disposal of such waste occur on properties under the same ownership or control. Hazardous Waste: Any waste material that meets the definition of "hazardous waste" in 6 NYCRR 371.1 and 40 CFR 261.3 and that is not excluded by regulation. Land Clearing Debris means vegetative matter, soil and rock resulting from activities such as land clearing and grubbing, utility line maintenance or seasonal or storm -related cleanup such as trees, stumps, brush and leaves and including wood chips generated from these materials. Land clearing debris does not include yard waste which has been collected at the curbside. Lead: Any metallic lead or waste material containing lead, e.g. waste paint chips, that exceed the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for lead as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24. Light Bulbs: All spent lamps or light bulbs being disposed that are regulated in 6 NYCRR Part 374- 3 or 40 CFR 273.5. Mercury: Liquid mercury or any waste containing mercury at levels exceeding the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit for mercury as defined in 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24. Mold: Construction material or debris contaminated with mold fungus that is unsuitable for reuse. Other Toxic Metals: Any waste containing a metal or contaminated by a metal identified in, and exceeding the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) limit of 6 NYCRR Part 371.3 or 40 CFR 261.24.PCBs: All electrical articles and equipment or the used oil removed from them, containing polychlorinated biphenyls at levels regulated by 6 NYCRR 371.4(e) Scrap Metal: Bits and pieces of metal parts (e.g., bars, tunings, rods, sheets, wire) or metal pieces that may be combined together with bolts or soldering (e.g., radiators, scrap automobiles, railroad box cars), which when worn or superfluous can be recycled. Solid Waste (Non C&D): Any garbage, refuse, sludge from a wastewater treatment plant, water supply treatment plant, or air pollution control facility and other discarded materials including solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained gaseous material, resulting from industrial, commercial, mining and agricultural operations, and from community activities, but does not include solid or dissolved materials in domestic sewage, or solid or dissolved materials in irrigation return flows or industrial discharges that are point sources subject to permit under 33 USC 1342, or source, special nuclear or by-product material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, except as may be provided by existing agreements between the State of New York and the government of the United States. Solvents: Substances (usually liquid) suitable for, or employed in, solution, or in dissolving something; as, water is the appropriate solvent for most salts, alcohol for resins, ether for fats, and mercury or acids for metals, etc. Typically these are chemicals are used as paint thinners or cleaning solutions. Spoil: Refuse material removed from an excavation. Used Oil: Any oil refined from crude oil, or any synthetic oil, that has been used, and as a result of such use is contaminated by physical or chemical impurities. "See 6 NYCRR 374-2 or 40 CFR 279" Thermostats: Any mercury -containing thermostat as defined in 6 NYCRR 374-3.1(d), or 40 CFR 273.4 Uncontaminated C&D Debris: C&D Debris that is not mixed or commingled with other solid waste at the point of generation, processing or disposal, and that is not contaminated with spills of a petroleum product, hazardous waste or industrial waste. Contamination from spills of a petroleum product does not include asphalt or concrete pavement that has come into contact with petroleum products through normal vehicle use of the roadway. CORNELL SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or hazardous substances on site, the following requirements shall apply to all projects: 1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during the construction process shall be stored in such a manner as to provide protection from vehicular damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site. 2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a temporary berm, boom, or similar containment barrier has been placed to prevent the inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any products. 3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall be located in such a manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in accordance with all fire and safety codes. B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable for the safe storage of such materials. 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health and safety concerns associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted by the Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to cleanup the spill, the following procedures shall be followed: A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall: 1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist, then leave the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section 1. 3). 2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a containment area; (2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that valves and drains are closed prior to diverting the product to this area. 3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent material from reaching a potential migratory route, through implementation of the WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1 24 MARCH 2014 following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not compromise worker safety. a. Stop the spill at once (if possible). b. Extinguish sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.). c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area. d. Utilize available spill control equipment in an effort to ensure that fires, explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread. e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source. g. Construct a temporary containment dike of sorbent materials, cinder blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified. h. Assess possible hazards to human health or the environment as a result of the release, fire, or explosion. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the Contractor shall monitor the affected equipment for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment. B. Spill Cleanup: 1. Following containment of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall be initiated. a. Use proper waste containers. b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place material in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible or reactive substances in the same container. c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed of in accordance with all applicable state and federal regulations. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-2 24 MARCH 2014 d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material. Absorbed material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid. e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace equipment in its proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to cleanup the spill. f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change clothes, if necessary, to avoid further contact with product. g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged through the Contractor. h. A Spill Report shall be completed, including a description of the event. A sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B. C. Fire or Explosion: 1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the site, the Contractor shall: a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified. b. Report to the scene, if safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency personnel. c. Ensure that people are cleared from the area. d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do so. e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures include stopping processes or operations, collecting and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment. 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate departments within the university and coordinate with the contractor for external reporting, if required. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3 24 MARCH 2014 The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation procedures. All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457- 7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following criteria apply: TABLE 1 CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING CRITERIA DESCRIPTION Quantity The spill must be known to be less than 5 gallons. Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment. Control The spill must be under control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious surface. Cleanup The spill must be cleaned -up within two hours of occurrence. Environment The spill must not have already entered into the soil or groundwater or onto surface water. A release of a "reportable quantity"' or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or "harmful quantities"- of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response Center, 1-800-424-8802. Spill Reporting Information. When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to provide the following information, if possible: 1. The date and time of the spill or release. 2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance. 3. An estimate of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment and the approximate duration of the event. 4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters involved or threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill. 5. The source of the release or spill. 6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party in charge of, or responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill. 7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution. 8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations at the spill site. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-4 24 MARCH 2014 9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation. 10. The extent of injuries, if any. 11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for exposed individuals. 12. Assistance required, if any. If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following: 1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge of the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675. 2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description should include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the release occuiTed; and (6) a description of the measures to be implemented to prevent and control future releases. Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance or oil that triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally responsible for knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner's spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities with you. Harnifirl Quantity: A Harmfi.rl Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface or adjoining shoreline; or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3). PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 44*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall include but are not limited to building, electrical, plumbing, and hot work. Willard Straight Hall is within the jurisdiction of the City of Ithaca. B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a structure, the Contractor is required to complete a "Notification of Demolition and Renovation" and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall also provide a copy of this notification to the Owner's Representative prior to any demolition. 1.2 INSPECTIONS A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all service charges, pavement cuts and repairs. 1.3 COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. 1.4 OWNER'S REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a planner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner. B. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a summary of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor and a copy of the permit. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 41 00*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perforin sufficient inspections and tests of all items of work, including those of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications. Furnish appropriate facilities, instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations and be keyed to the construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC program. 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION A. Include a control system for the following phases of inspection: Pre -Installation Conference. For all sections where pre -installations are defined, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre -installation meeting. The Contractor shall make available, during this meeting, all approved submittals and products. The following minimum personnel shall be at the meeting: a. Project Manager. b. Project Field Supervisor c. Subcontractor d. Architect's Representative e. Owner's Representative f. Commissioning Agent, when applicable g. Testing Agency, when applicable 2. Preparatory Inspection. Perforin this inspection prior to beginning work on any definable feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products, and equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary work has been completed; physically examine materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand. 3. Initial Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for compliance with contract requirements. 4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular work. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1 24 MARCH 2014 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as opposed to "off-the-shelf' items. The CQC Representative at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection or installation. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work and acceptance of the completed project. 1.4 TESTING A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship requirements. 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the work. The Representative shall have the authority to call for test samples, to approve or to reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative shall not be authorized to make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 00*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL Ithaca, New York 1.1 GENERAL SECTION 01 45 29 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform specified services. 1. Contractor shall cooperate wi services. the aboratory to facilitate the execution of its required Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. B. Testing Laboratory services are specified in connection with work including but not limited to the following: 1. New York State Building Code, Section 17, Special Inspections 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF LABORATORY A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for hndependent Laboratory Qualification", 1971 edition, published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329 -05b, "Standard Specifications for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction". C. Authorized to operate in the State of New York. D. Testing and inspections shall be performed under the direction of Licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of New York who shall be responsible for administering all testing and inspections and shall certify any local agency requirements. E. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. F. Testing Equipment: 1. Calibrated at maximum 12 month intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either: a. National Bureau of Standards b. Accepted values of natural physical constants. 2. Submit copy of certificate of calibration made by accredited calibration agency. 1.3 LABORATORY DUTIES A. Cooperate with Owner, Architect and Contractor; provide qualified personnel promptly on notice. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 45 29-1 24 MARCH 2014 B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction. 1. Comply with specified standards. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify Owner, Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products. D. Should Laboratory tests of material performed at specified intervals of time indicate that strengths do not meet Specification requirements, the Inspection Agency and Geotechnical Engineer shall IMMEDIATELY notify the Owner, Contractor and Architect. The Architect shall determine whether remedial action is necessary. E. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Architect, Owner, Contractor, and one copy to Record Documents File. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Observations on compliance with Contract Documents. F. Prepare a summary report for each category of inspection certifying that the work has been inspected and meets the Contract Documents. Specifically list all discrepancies found which have not yet been repaired or resolved. G. Perform additional tests as required by Architect or the Owner. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 45 29-2 24 MARCH 2014 1.4 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, and Manufacturer's operations. B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and for which testing is specified. C. Provide to the laboratory the approved design mixes proposed to be used for concrete, and other material mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. D. Furnish copies of Products test reports as required. E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For Laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples. F. Notify laboratory a minimum of 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. 1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse laboratory for personnel and travel expenses incun-ed due to Contractor's responsibility. G. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's convenience. H. Employ and pay for the services of a separate, equally qualified independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required when initial tests indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 29*• WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 45 29-3 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary facilities and controls required by all trades for construction, and remove on completion of Work. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the Contractor's option. B. Materials may be new or used, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes, standards and specifications. 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously available to render first aid at the site. 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site. B. Equipment: 1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment ready for instant use at all areas of the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of Fire Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards. 3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system. 4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure and supply system to reach each area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building. C. Enforce fire -safety discipline: 1. Store volatile materials in an isolated, protected location. 2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAYTEMPORARY FAC TIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-1 24 MARCH 2014 3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity of hazardous conditions. Smoking is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings. 4. Closely supervise welding and torch -cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible materials and volatile conditions. 5. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and fuel. D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection certificate attached to each extinguisher. E. Welding or burning operations will be conducted under a Hot Work Permit. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating condition within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety. F. Advise Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety of any items affecting Life Safety, e.g., temporary shutdowns of fire protection, fire detection, etc. 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety for personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes and other such equipment. B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel. C. Maintain all equipment in a safe condition. 2.5 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas of the existing building occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees and operations from construction work. 1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable codes and standards. Temporary enclosures to be constructed of/" CDX plywood sheathing on nominal 2 x 4 wood or metal framing. a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture. b. In locations where fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and ceilings with fire -retardant paint as required by local fire regulations. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAYTEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-2 24 MARCH 2014 2.6 GUARDRAILS AND BARRICADES A. Provide guardrails, barricades, fences, footways and other devices necessary to protect personnel and employees at the site, and the public, against hazards on or adjacent to the construction site. 1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards. 2. Provide temporary signage to redirect the public at the work area. 2.7 TEMPORARY STAGING AREA A. Exterior Staging Area: A temporary staging area — the northern vendor parking space has been identified by the Owner. This space is intended for miscellaneous use, e.g., dumpster siting, stone cutting, etc. B. Interior Staging Area: A temporary staging area within the Elmhirst Room has been identified by the Owner. This space is intended for the storage of materials and equipment. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to protect the existing finished floors within this area. 2.8 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. No signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner. 2.9 SECURITY A. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the Owner. 2.10 FIELD OFFICES A. The Owner shall designate a space within the facility to serve as a field office for the use of the Contractor and Owner. B. Provide a designated break area within the project site limits to minimize interaction between construction personnel and the Campus community. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Consult with Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the work. 1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment of the Work. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAYTEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-3 24 MARCH 2014 2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by Contract Documents. 3.2 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in sections of Division 2 through 28. B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout. C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner. D. Maintain, clean, service and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality specified for the original installation. E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site. F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from accumulation of waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the approval of the Owner's Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction debris and maintain dust control in compliance with the Storni Water Pollution Prevention Plan and to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.3 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services: 1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction. 2. At completion of the Project. B. Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal. C. Restore existing facilities used for temporary purposes to original condition. ***END OF SECTION 01 50 00*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAYTEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00-4 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required by all trades for construction. Remove on completion of Work. B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and distribution. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code, 2008 edition. B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility company requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric power for constructing the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its operations as possible as long as such connections do not over -load the capacity of the Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power. The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as long as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage of these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor. B. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required. C. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be maintained in each room. The required temporary lighting must be maintained only during working hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-1 24 MARCH 2014 D. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner or the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule shall provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges relating to shutdowns. E. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal The Contractor shall: 1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any additional cost entailed thereby. 2. Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner. 2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR A. Use of Existing Elevator 1. If the Contractor elects to use the existing elevator equipment, the Contractor shall: a. Provide adequate protection for such equipment and shall operate such equipment within a capacity not to exceed that allowed by law, rule or regulation. b. Provide for the maintenance of the elevator equipment as approved by the Owner's Representative. c. Leave such equipment in perfect condition. 2.4 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. The Contractor shall provide for ventilation of the work area until Physical Completion of the Work and shall control such ventilation to avoid excessive moisture levels and rates of drying of construction materials, including but not limited to concrete and to plaster, and to prevent condensation on sensitive surfaces. The Contractor shall be responsible for any moisture intrusion that is detrimental to the Project. 2.5 CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Site superintendent or the representative shall carry a mobile cellular phone at all times. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2 24 MARCH 2014 2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide adequate toilet and washing facilities for the use of personnel and employees; locate as directed by the Project Manager, Randall Nesbitt, 255-7935. B. Existing plumbing facilities shall not be used by construction personnel. C. Facilities may be portable chemical -type toilets or temporary flush toilets connected to sanitary sewer, screened for privacy. D. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures in a neat, clean and sanitary condition. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY ***END OF SECTION 01 51 00"* TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished by the Owner in a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obscuring from public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging and storage areas. 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction space. C. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. D. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installation. E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged. F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage. 1.3 STORAGE A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with the daily functioning of the histitution. B. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. C. Storage piles shall be located within the area designated as the staging areas. Only materials required for this project may be located within the staging areas. The Contractor shall work to ensure that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area, the Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus. D. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as to exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1 24 MARCH 2014 E. Should it become necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative, shall move such materials or equipment. 1.4 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may be necessary to adequately protect materials and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including items furnished by the Owner which have been damaged or stolen prior to completion of the Work. B. Protection of Utilities 1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities, pipelines, structures and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existing facilities from damage. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate only. The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in advance of its operation. C. Protective Covering 1. All finished surfaces shall be protected by the Contractor as follows: a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades. b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. The Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks, gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including painting as specified) to satisfaction of Owner. c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before moving any materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall have rubber tires on wheels. d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting and all finish flooring during all phases of the work including after installation. e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish including existing flooring shall be protected by overlaying with plywood in all areas subject to construction traffic within and without the building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including but not limited to flooring, wood in -fill stairs, cabinetry, counters, equipment, etc. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-2 24 MARCH 2014 2. Existing HVAC ductwork shall be protected by the Contractor as follows to prevent introduction of contaminants: a. Ductwork shall not be exposed to moisture or contaminants at any point in the manufacturing, shipping, storage or installation process. b. Ductwork shall not be staged or stored outside or otherwise exposed to the weather. c. Ductwork shall be transported only inside of covered vehicles. d. Once installed, ductwork shall be protected from contamination during the construction process. 1.5 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION A. Protect installed products, including Owner -provided products, and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations. B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas. C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab doors, when elevators are used by construction personnel. D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage: Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials in place, in areas subject to foot traffic. 2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects. 3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas where storage of products will occur. E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces: 1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products. 2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent unprotected areas. F. Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 66 00*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-3 EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching required to complete the Work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. B. Upon written instructions of the Owner's Representative: 1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's observation of covered work. 2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified. 3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed work. 4. Patch work uncovered or removed. C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof. D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. F. Openings and Chases 1. The Contractor shall build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract. 2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues, have been provided the Contractor shall build in, over, around and finish all such openings as required to complete the Work. 3. The Contractor shall furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution of the Work. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-1 24 MARCH 2014 1.2 HISTORIC BUILDING IDENTIFICATION A. This building and site are considered of irreplaceable cultural, material, and aesthetic value because of architectural and historic significance. 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor shall respect this value and significance, and exercise special care during all phases of the Project to ensure that the building, its details, materials, and finishes are not damaged. B. This is a restoration project. Do not disturb or damage sound original material which is in place or is found on the site. C. In the event that features, materials, or artifacts are uncovered or discovered during the execution of work, do not disturb and area of discovery until the Architect has been notified and the Owner has had the opportunity to evaluate the found materials. D. Protect all existing finishes, features, and components of an architectural or historic nature designated to remain in place, to be evaluated, or to be salvaged and stored for future use. E. Exercise extreme care in removing historic elements and materials or any kind attached to historic elements. F. Do not pry apart members whose finish will thereby be damaged by chipping, crazing, or cracking, or whose structural integrity will thereby be impaired. G. Materials and/or fixtures scheduled to be salvaged shall be carefully removed, labeled, stored or restored and reinstalled as directed. H. In the event of damage immediately notify the Architect and make all repairs and replacements necessary. Work must be approved by and at no cost to the Owner. NOTE: Repair of the original rather than replacement with new materials may be the prefen-ed method and must be reviewed with the Architect prior to making repairs. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a written request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting or alteration which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety of any portion of the Project. Include: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Description of the affected work. 3. The necessity for doing the cutting or alteration. 4. The effect on the work of the Owner's property, or on the structural integrity of the Project. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-2 24 MARCH 2014 5. Description of the proposed work: a. The scope of cutting, patching or alteration. b. Contractor and trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. The extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternatives to cutting or patching. 7. Designation of the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching. 8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. B. Should conditions of the work of the schedule indicate a change of products from the original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions and Product Options. C. Contractor shall submit a written notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following structural elements: a. Structural steel and lintels b. Miscellaneous structural metals c. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment d. Equipment supports B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Primary operational systems and equipment b. Fire protection systems c. Control systems d. Communication systems e. Electrical wiring systems WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-3 24 MARCH 2014 C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product involved. B. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during: 1. Cutting and patching. B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or performance of the work. C. Report unsatisfactory or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide shoring, bracing and other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of that portion of the Work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-4 24 MARCH 2014 D. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction, and will provide proper surfaces to receive new work. 1. In general,. where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of services is required. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-5 24 MARCH 2014 4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of the existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform visual appearance. 5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re -hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even - plane surface of uniform appearance. D. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. E. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. F. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. The Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. ***END OF SECTION 01 73 29*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-6 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1.1 INSPECTIONS A. When the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings, equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Owner's Representative shall make a detailed inspection of the Work to insure that all requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. B. A copy of the report of the inspection shall be furnished to the Contractor as the inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work found to be incomplete or defective. C. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or con-ected, the Contractor shall so advise the Owner's Representative. After receipt of this notification, the Owner's Representative shall inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection. A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work shall be furnished to the Contractor. D. After receipt of notification of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Owner's Representative shall make an inspection to verify completion of the exception items appearing on the report of final inspection. 1.2 FINAL CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any kind and with all Work in new condition and in perfect order. 111 addition, upon completion of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings, rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and/or its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications. 2. Roofs, utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned. 3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the entire floor of that space or area shall be refinished as recommended by the manufacturers of the flooring. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1 24 MARCH 2014 5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition. 6. All new glass shall be washed and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement of its activities until the building is turned over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean. 7. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces. 1.3 MAINTENANCE STOCK A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance stock. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED **END OF SECTION 01 77 00*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed work. 2. Operations and maintenance data shall be available to the Owner at time of substantial completion. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems. 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual and CD for use by Owner's personnel. B. Format: 1. Size: 8-1/2" x 11" and a CD with electronic files. 2. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file. 3. Drawings: a. Drawings are required in both hard copy and electronic format. b. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. c. Fold larger drawings to the size of the text pages. 4. Provide fly -leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of equipment. a. Provide type description of product, and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide indexed thumb tab. 5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List: a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structure as applicable. c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-1 24 MARCH 2014 C. Binders: 1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 2. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings. 1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in a systematic order. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontract or installer. b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. c. Identify the area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. c. Delete reference to inapplicable information. C. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-2 24 MARCH 2014 3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. E. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in the event of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit a CD with electronic files and six (6) copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes: L Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products: a. Catalog number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. hiformation required for reordering special -manufactured products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Content, for moisture -protection and weather -exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Applicable standards b. Chemical composition c. Details of installation 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-3 24 MARCH 2014 D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective sections of Specifications. 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit a CD with electronic files and six (6) copies of complete manual in final form. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble -shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication required: a. List of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-4 24 MARCH 2014 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As -installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. 9. Each contractor's coordination drawings. a. As -installed color coded piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories of panel boards: a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As -installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-5 24 MARCH 2014 5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble -shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections of Specifications and General Conditions. 1.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit two (2) copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents sixty (60) calendar days prior to acceptance. 1. Architect will review draft and return one copy (1) with comments. B. Submit one copy (1) of completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior to final acceptance. 1. Copy will be returned with comments. C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form prior to final acceptance. 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems: 1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction: 1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-6 24 MARCH 2014 C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been instructed, describing: 1. Method of Instruction. 2. Equipment and Systems Operated. 3. Length of Instruction Period. D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing. 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. List under clear plastic (1/8" thick) all operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by Owner for operating all systems and equipment. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 23*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-7 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS 1.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall: A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C. Co -execute submittals when so specified. D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. E. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner. 1.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors. B. Number of original copies required: Two (2) each. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item. 1. Product or work item. 2. Finn, with name of principal, address and telephone number. 3. Scope. 4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 5. Duration. 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare in duplicate packets. B. Format: 1. Size 8-1/2 in. x 11 in., punch sheets for 3 -ring binder. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1 24 MARCH 2014 a. Fold larger sheets to fit binders. 2. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS". List: a. Title of Project b. Name of Contractor C. Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 1.4 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. Make final submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period. 1.5 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. Submit warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of Specifications. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 36*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-2 24 MARCH 2014 CORNELL SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 7. Field Test records 8. Construction photographs 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the Owner's Representative and the Architect. 1.3 RECORDING A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1 24 MARCH 2014 C. Drawings Record drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract Drawings using colored ink or pencil, and the construction record drawings shall be kept current on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a drawing is to carry the notation "per Change Order No. X", or similar reference which cites the reason for the change. The day-to-day construction record drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner's Representative for review upon request. The "Record" drawings shall show the following information: all significant changes in plan, sections, elevations and details, such as shifts in location of walls, doors, windows, stairs and the like made during construction; 2. all significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing, lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock -out" panels made during construction; 3. final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and any significant changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change Order or job conditions; 4. final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas, sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plmbing, including, but not limited to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters, clean -outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water drainage; and 5. final location and arrangement of all underground utilities, connections to building and/or rerouting of existing utilities, including, but not limited to, sanitary, storm, heating, electric, signal, gas, water and telephone.. 6. Final topographic contours of finished earth surfaces, finished grades, streets, etc. 7. Additions to project, elimination of project components, relocation of components. D. Specifications and Addenda Legibly mark each section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2 24 MARCH 2014 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. At Contract close-out, deliver all record documents to the Owner's Representative. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate 6. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative. PART 2 — PRODUCTS —NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION — NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 39*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL ELMHIRST ROOM EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3 24 MARCH 2014 Willard Straight Hall - Ehnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of selective demolition shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused. 1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre -demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property for dust control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of selective demolition activities with starting and ending dates for each activity. C. Pre -demolition photographs or video. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Bero Architecture PLLC 02 41 19-1 14010.024119.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. D. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire -protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. E. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Bero Architecture PLLC 02 41 19-2 14010.024119.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire -suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. b. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining. ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Temporary Shoring: Unless detailed in Drawings, design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. B. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 4. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris -removal operations to ensure minimum interference with building occupants, corridors, elevators, loading areas, parking areas, roads, streets, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Remove and Recycle Items: 1. Existing carpet tile scheduled to be removed shall be recycled to meet Cornell University recycling program standards. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Bero Architecture PLLC 02 41 19-3 14010.024119.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 D. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. E. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. F. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. END OF SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Bero Architecture PLLC 02 41 19-4 14010.024119.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 04 01 40 — STONE MASONRY RESTORATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of stone masonry restoration shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. Rebuild stone masonry. a. Bluestone. 2. Replacement stone masonry. a. Limestone quoins. 3. Limited repointing joints. 4. Limited stone repair. 5. Cleaning exposed stone surfaces. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01, Section "Allowances" for allowance involving replacement limestone. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Low -Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Replacement stone units and their jointing, showing relation of existing to new units. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. D. MSDS: For products indicated. STONE MASONRY Bero Architecture PLLC 04 01 40-1 RESTORATION 14010.040140.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Stone Restoration Finn Qualifications: Engage an experienced masonry restoration firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. Experience installing standard unit masonry is not sufficient experience for masonry restoration work. 1. Restoration Worker Qualifications: Persons who have a minimum of 5 years of experience in restoration work of types they will be performing. a. Each mason scheduled to perforin work on the Project will submit samples of each type of joint preparation and repointing skill required. Each sample will be prepared in the presence of the Architect who will witness the compliance of the workmanship with that required for the project. Any mason whose work is rejected will not perform work on the Project. b. When stone units are being patched, assign at least one worker among those performing patching work who is trained and certified by manufacturer of patching compound to apply its products. c. Field Supervision: Restoration specialist firms shall maintain experienced full-time supervisors on Project site during times that stone restoration and cleaning work is in progress. B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of restoration and cleaning to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation. Stone Repair: Prepare sample areas for each type of stone indicated to have repair work performed. Erect sample areas in existing walls unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate quality of materials, workmanship, and blending with existing work. Include the following as a minimum: a. Rebuilding: Six stone units replaced. 1) Ashlar bluestone. 2) Joint sample: Ruled joint. b. Patching: Three small holes at least 1 inch in diameter. 1) Limestone. 2. Mortar samples: a. Provide mortar paddy samples of each type of mortar scheduled in a range of color and aggregate in order to achieve a match to the existing mortar. 1) Provide a minimum of (3) preliminary samples for review by Owner. 2) Provide additional samples in order to meet the approval of the Owner. 3. Cleaning: Clean an area approximately 2 sq. ft. for each type of stone and surface condition. STONE MASONRY Bero Architecture PLLC 04 01 40-2 RESTORATION 14010.040140.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 a. Limestone. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STONE MATERIALS A. General: Provide natural building stone of variety, physical properties, color, texture, grain, veining, finish, size, and shape to match existing stone. 1. For existing stone that exhibits a range of colors, texture, grain, veining, finishes, sizes, or shapes, provide stone that proportionally matches that range rather than stone that matches an individual color, texture, grain, veining, finish, size, or shape within that range. B. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone from single quarry. 2.2 BLUESTONE A. Bluestone: Provide New York/Pennsylvania seamface stone. Stone color and texture to match existing. 1. Bond pattern: Random range ashlar with splayed joints set in heights and lengths to match existing where scheduled to be exposed. 2. Mortar joints: Ruled to match existing. 2.3 LIMESTONE A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 568. 1. Classification: II Medium -Density. 2. Description: Oolitic limestone. B. Varieties and Sources: Indiana limestone quarried in Lawrence, Monroe, or Owen Counties, Indiana. 1. Indiana Limestone Grade and Color: Standard, gray, according to grade and color classification established by ILI. C. Finish: Smooth finish, matching standard ILI finish and existing. D. Match existing stone for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects. STONE MASONRY Bero Architecture PLLC 04 01 40-3 RESTORATION 14010.040140.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Ehnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 E. Fabricator: Stone shall be fabricated by the following: 1. Adam Ross Cut Stone Co., Inc. 2. Contact: David Ross, 1003 Broadway, Albany, NY 12204. 2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, white or gray where required for color matching of exposed mortar. 1. Provide cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144 to be used as a general guideline. Particle gradation may vary to achieve an accurate match to exiting mortar. 1. Color: Provide natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. 2. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible. Blend several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match. D. Mortar Pigments: Not approved for use. E. Water: Potable. 2.5 MANUFACTURED REPAIR MATERIALS A. Stone Patching Compound: Factory -mixed cementitious product that is custom manufactured for patching stone. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; Jahn Restoration Mortars. 2. Use formulation that is vapor- and water permeable (equal to or more than the stone), exhibits low shrinkage, has lower modulus of elasticity than the stone units being repaired, and develops high bond strength to all types of stone. 3. Formulate patching compound in colors, textures, and grain to match stone being patched. 2.6 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water: Potable. B. Hot Water: Water heated to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F. STONE MASONRY Bero Architecture PLLC 04 01 40-4 RESTORATION 14010.040140.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 C. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium polyphosphate, 1/2 cup of laundry detergent, and 20 quarts of hot water for every 5 gal. of solution required. 2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Setting Buttons: Strips of resilient plastic buttons or vulcanized neoprene, Type A Shore durometer hardness of 50 to 70, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thicknesses and bed depths of stone units without intruding into required depths of pointing materials. 2.8 MORTAR MIXES A. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer. 1. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly niix cementitious materials and sand together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 15 to 30 minutes. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within one hour of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. B. Do not use admixtures in mortar unless otherwise indicated. C. Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions: 1. Rebuilding (setting) Mortar for Bluestone: Type N, 1 part white or gray portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts sand. 2. Rebuilding (setting) Mortar for Limestone: Type N, 1 part white portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts sand. 2.9 STONE FABRICATION A. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match approved samples and mockups. B. Cut stone to produce uniform joints to match joint width of existing. C. Fabricate molded work, including washes and drips, to produce stone shapes with a uniform profile throughout entire unit length, with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and with matching profile at joints between units. STONE MASONRY Bero Architecture PLLC 04 01 40-5 RESTORATION 14010.040140.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Ehnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Protect persons, surrounding surfaces of area being restored from harm resulting from stone restoration work. 3.2 STONE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. At locations indicated, remove stone that is to be reused. Carefully demolish or remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding stone, in a planner that permits replacement with full-size units. B. Support and protect remaining stonework that surrounds removal area. Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition. C. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including, voids, cracks, bulges, and loose units in existing stone or unit masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items. D. Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole stone units as possible. 1. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from stone by cleaning with hand chisels, brushes, and water. 2. Remove sealants by cutting close to stone with utility knife and cleaning with approved solvents. Submit MSDS of solvents for approval. E. Clean stone surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in preparation for replacement. F. Replace removed damaged stone with other removed stone in good quality, where possible, or with new stone matching existing stone, including size. Do not use broken units unless they can be cut to usable size. G. Do not allow face bedding of stone. Before setting, inspect to verify that each stone has been cut so that, when it is set in final position, natural bedding planes are essentially horizontal. Reject and replace stones with vertical bedding planes except as required for arches, lintels, and copings. H. Install replacement stone into bonding, and coursing pattern of existing stone. If cutting is required, use a motor -driven saw designed to cut stone with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Finish edges to blend with appearance of edges of existing stone. 1. Maintain joint width for replacement stone to match existing joints. 2. Use setting buttons or shims to set stone accurately spaced with uniform joints. STONE MASONRY Bero Architecture PLLC 04 01 40-6 RESTORATION 14010.040140.08314 Willard Straight Ha Cornell University Ithaca, New York Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway March 24, 2014 I. Set replacement stone with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints. Butter vertical joints for full width before setting and set units in full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated. Replace existing anchors with new anchors of size and type. 1. Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing stonework — Ruled Joint for Bluestone. 2. Rake mortar used for laying stone before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing stone, and at same time as repointing of surrounding area. 3. When mortar is sufficiently hard to support units, remove shims and other devices interfering with pointing of joints. 3.3 SETTING LIMESTONE WITH MORTAR A. Set stone in full bed of mortar with head joints filled unless otherwise indicated. B. Rake joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 1/2 inch. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. C. Point stone joints by placing pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. D. Tool joints with a round jointer having a diameter 1/8 inch larger than width of joint, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard. 3.4 STONE PATCHING REPAIR A. Remove deteriorated material and remove adjacent material that has begun to deteriorate. Carefully remove additional material so patch will not have feathered edges but will have square or slightly undercut edges on area to be patched and will be at least 1/4 inch thick, but not less than recommended by patching compound manufacturer. B. Mask adjacent mortar joint or rake for repointing if patch will extend to edge of stone unit. C. Mix patching compound in individual batches to match each stone unit being patched. D. Brush -coat stone surfaces with slurry coat of patching compound according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Place patching compound in layers as recommended by patching compound manufacturer, but not less than 1/4 inch or more than 2 inches thick. Roughen surface of each layer to provide a key for next layer. 1. Trowel, scrape, or carve surface of patch to match texture and surrounding surface plane or contour of the stone. Shape and finish surface before or after curing, as determined by testing, to best match existing stone. F. Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until patching compound has set. STONE MASONRY Bero Architecture PLLC 04 01 40-7 RESTORATION 14010.040140.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Ehnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 G. Remove and replace patches with hairline cracks or that show separation from stone at edges, and those that do not match adjoining stone in color or texture. 3.5 CLEANING LIMESTONE, GENERAL A. Cleaning Objective: Evaluate the condition of the existing limestone in the scheduled opening. Provide a written list of cleaning process, including protection of existing stone and surrounding interior construction, to the Owner and Architect for review and approval. The existing limestone is NOT expected to be cleaned to like -new condition; and the least invasive cleaning methods is required. Removal of surface dust and grime is expected. Spot clean as necessary to remove tar -like substances and mortar. B. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from bottom to top of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Ensure that dirty residues and rinse water will not wash over cleaned, dry surfaces. C. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each stone material and location. 1. Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to cleaner being used. Do not use plastic -bristle brushes if natural -fiber brushes will resist cleaner being used. 2. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage stone. a. Equip units with pressure gages. 3. For water -spray application, use fan -shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees. 4. For heated water -spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated. D. Perform cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging stone surfaces. 3.6 PRELIMINARY CLEANING OF LIMESTONE A. Preliminary Cleaning: Before beginning general cleaning, remove extraneous substances that are resistant to cleaning methods being used. Extraneous substances include paint, caulking, asphalt, and tar. 1. Prepare and apply to a single location and review with Owner. With approval of procedure, continue with remainder of stone surface. 2. Carefully remove heavy accumulations of material from surface of stone with sharp chisel. Do not scratch or chip stone surface. 3. Remove paint and caulking with alkaline paint remover. Submit MSDS of paint removal for approval. STONE MASONRY Bero Architecture PLLC 04 01 40-8 RESTORATION 14010.040140.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 a. Repeat application up to two tunes if needed. 4. Remove asphalt and tar with solvent -type paint remover. Submit MSDS of paint removal for approval. a. Apply paint remover only to asphalt and tar by brush without prewetting. b. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for 10 to 30 minutes. c. Repeat application if needed. 3.7 CLEANING LIMESTONE A. Detergent Cleaning: 1. Wet stone with hot water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Scrub stone with detergent solution using medium -soft brushes until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that stone surface remains wet. 3. Rinse with hot water applied by low-pressure spray to remove detergent solution and soil. 4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup. 3.8 FINAL CLEANING — STONE REBUILDING WORK A. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean limestone as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed stone surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff -nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, spray applied at low pressure. 1. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes. 2. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners. END OF SECTION 04 01 40 STONE MASONRY Bero Architecture PLLC 04 01 40-9 RESTORATION 14010.040140.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 05 91 00 - HISTORIC TREATMENT OF ORNAMENTAL METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of historic treatment of ornamental metal shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited: 1. Decorative Railing: a. Dismantling and removing metal for off-site repair, modifications, refinishing. b. Providing missing elements to match identified existing elements. c. Cleaning and finishing of metal. d. Reinstalling repaired metal. Door Pulls. a. Custom design and fabrication. b. Installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for handling of historic items being selectively removed from historic property or items found during work. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware schedule. C. Design hntent: 1. Original wrought iron work was designed and crafted by Samuel Yellin and his studio, g ni includinbut not limited to the main stair railing (Stair SA), various light fixtures, and door hardware. a. Design, fabrication, and installation of the parts to the decorative railing and the door pulls shall honor the design and craftsmanship of the Samuel Yellin work in the building, but not seek to replicate exactly. 1) Decorative railing: Stair SA, main stair upper levels. 2) Door pull: door hardware — Fourth floor. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. HISTORIC TREATMENT OF Bero Architecture PLLC 05 91 00-1 ORNAMENTAL METAL 14010.059100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24. 2014 B. Replacement Ornamental Metal Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of replacement ornamental metal. Indicate materials and profiles of each duplicated ornamental metal member including fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. C. Samples for Verification: For the following items: New ornamental metal material to be used for duplicating existing missing materials. a. Rosette. b. Bracket. D. Door Pull Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of door pulls, including joinery, finishing, fasteners, and accessory items. E. Historic Treatment Program: Include protection of surrounding materials on the building and Project site during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be used for each phase of the historic treatment work. 1. If alternative materials and methods to those indicated are proposed for any phase of historic treatment work, provide a written description, including evidence of successful use on other comparable projects. 2. Sequencing and Scheduling: Submit sequence and scheduling of ornamental metal work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metalworker Qualifications: Engage one of the following firms experienced in the historic treatment of ornamental metal similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in historic treatment of ornamental metal with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Cardine Studios. 2. Durand's Forge. 3. Samuel Yellin Metalworkers. B. Source Limitation for Replacement Cast Materials: Obtain castings for historic treatment of ornamental metal from a single source to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern, and texture. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Items Designated for Removal and Reinstallation: Pack, handle, and ship ornamental units and accessories that are indicated for removal and reinstallation. Pack in suitable packs or in heavy- duty cartons. Store items in dry storage facility until ready for treatment and reinstallation. B. Replacement Items for Installation: Pack, handle, and ship replacement ornamental units and accessories packed in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. HISTORIC TREATMENT OF Bero Architecture PLLC 05 91 00-2 ORNAMENTAL METAL 14010.059100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Order replacement materials required to duplicate existing materials at the earliest possible date, to avoid delaying the Work. B. Perform historic treatment of ornamental metal work in the following sequence: 1. Salvage existing ornamental metal scheduled to be modified. 2. Clean ornamental metal surfaces. 3. Repair existing ornamental metal, including patching and reinforcing. Retain as much original material as possible. 4. Provide new materials to modify per Drawings. 5. Provide sacrificial coating to ornamental metal as scheduled. 6. Reinstall as shown on Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL MATERIALS Metals: Provide ornamental metalwork composed of metals of the forms and types that comply with requirements of referenced standards and which match existing metals for alloy and finish. Exposed -to -view surfaces exhibiting imperfections that are not consistent with the original materials are not acceptable. B. Genuine Wrought Iron: Provide wrought iron with not more than 0.035 percent carbon, containing slag (iron silicate), and worked by hand or machine forged in forms indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded or filled, complying with applicable AWS specifications, and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. Filler metal shall match as closely as possible existing metal to be filled. B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. 1. 2. Provide fasteners to match existing fasteners, in material and type of fastener. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting ornamental metal components and for attaching them to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or exposed fasteners are the existing fastening method. C. Lead Packing: Provide lead packing for anchoring steel posts in concrete or stone where required to match existing anchorage. HISTORIC TREATMENT OF Bero Architecture PLLC 05 91 00-3 ORNAMENTAL METAL 14010.059100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 D. Sandpaper for Ferrous Metal Mechanical Cleaning: Aluminum oxide paper, emery paper, or fine steel wool. 2.3 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water: Clean, potable, free of oils, acids, alkalis, salts and organic matter. B. Hot Water: Water heated to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F. C. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium polyphosphate, 1/2 cup of laundry detergent, and 20 quarts of hot water for every 5 gal. of solution required. D. Brushes: Fiber bristle only. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Form ornamental metal to match existing shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines, and angles. Provide components in sizes and profiles indicated to match existing ornamental metal. B. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble units and to attach to existing work. C. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. D. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration. E. Form hent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. F. Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other defects that impair strength or appearance. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks. G. Finish castings to match existing ornamental metal work. 1. Rosette Casting for Handrail Bracket: Rosette shall match existing handrail bracket rosettes located on the fifth floor of Stair SA. H. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and as required to match existing work. HISTORIC TREATMENT OF Bero Architecture PLLC 05 91 00-4 ORNAMENTAL METAL 14010.059100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 2.5 FINISHES. GENERAL A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP FINISHING A. Following shop cleaning, shop finish with wax and linseed oil. 1. Submit alternate finishing procedures to Owner for review and approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES, GENERAL A. General: Treatment of historic items shall be based on minimal disturbance and retain as much original material as possible. Duplication and replacement of historic items shall be used only where indicated or scheduled. B. Modifications to Ornamental IVietal Items: Match existing materials retaining as much original material as possible to complete the repair. 3.2 EXAMINATION Documentation: During removal process, protect existing material and existing construction from damage. Label each salvaged element in a system coordinated and keyed to elevation drawings and/or photographs prepared by the Contractor before removing from structure. Avoid parting joints wherever possible, to prevent damage and weakening of assemblies. B. At time of reinstallation, examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of metal components. 3.3 FINISHING A. Preparation: Prior to finishing, remove all traces of rust, corrosion, scale and old paint leaving the surface completely clean. 1. Lightly brush apply detergent cleaner on metal surfaces. Do not brush or abrade surface. 2. Thoroughly cloth rinse surface with clean water to remove cleaner and loosened dirt. 3. Wipe surface completely dry with clean soft cloths. HISTORIC TREATMENT OF Bero Architecture PLLC 05 91 00-5 ORNAMENTAL METAL 14010.059100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 4. Immediately finish as scheduled. B. Shop finish wjth wax and linseed oil: 1. Heat metal surfaces; wipe surfaces with emery cloth. 2. When cool, rub a combination of beeswax and boiled linseed oil into surface with a soft cloth. C. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by providing a temporary protective covering before shipping for reinstallation. END OF SECTION 05 91 00 HISTORIC TREATMENT OF Bero Architecture PLLC 05 91 00-6 ORNAMENTAL METAL 14010.059100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of miscellaneous rough carpentry shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Wood furring. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC -ES: 1. Preservative -treated wood. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2 -inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2 -inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U 1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH Bero Architecture PLLC 06 10 53-1 CARPENTRY 14010.061083.06214 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on -grade. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH Bero Architecture PLLC 06 10 53-2 CARPENTRY 14010.061083.06214 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 B. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building, Code. END OF SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH Bero Architecture PLLC 06 10 53-3 CARPENTRY 14010.061083.06214 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 06 42 14 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of stile and rail wood paneling shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. Stile and rail wood paneling directly adjacent to stile and rail wood doors. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing stile and rail wood paneling unless concealed within other construction before paneling installation. 3. Shop finishing of stile and rail wood paneling. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 6 "Stile and Rail Woor Paneling" for fabricating stile and rail panels. 2. Division 8 "Stile and Rail Wood Doors" for fabricating stile and rail wood doors. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials and processes. B. Samples: 1. Lumber for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent - finished paneling. 3. Veneer -faced panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut. Include at least one face -veneer seam and finish as specified. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install paneling until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. STILE AND RAIL Bero Architecture PLLC 06 42 14-1 WOOD PANELING 14010.064214.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELING FABRICATORS A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Chautauqua Woods Fine Doors & Entryways. 2. E.F. Thresh Inc. 3. Heartwood Fine Windows and Doors. 4. Honeoye Falls Millwork. 2.2 PANELING, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of stile and rail wood paneling indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 2.3 STILE AND RAIL WOOD PANELING FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species: White oak, quarter sawn/sliced. C. Panels: Flat panels. D. Insert Panels: Book and balance match face veneers within panels. No matching is required between adjacent panels; select and arrange panels for similarity of grain pattern and color between adjacent panels. E. Shop assemble stile and rail paneling into largest units practical for delivery and installation. Provide shop -prepared detachable joints for necessary field connections. Sand and pull joints tight in shop so field joints will comply with joint tolerances for specified grade. Unless otherwise indicated, provide continuous mortise -and -tenon joints between panel units and provide removable temporary protection for joints during handling and delivery. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Materials, General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. STILE AND RAIL Bero Architecture PLLC 06 42 14-2 WOOD PANELING 14010.064214.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. 2.6 FABRICATION Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. B. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2.7 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish paneling at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing paneling, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply two coats of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of paneling. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System - 5, conversion varnish. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Filled Finish for Open -Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash -coat sealer and allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 5. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60 -degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition paneling to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. STILE AND RAIL Bero Architecture PLLC 06 42 14-3 WOOD PANELING 14010.064214.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install paneling to comply with same grade as paneling to be installed. B. Install paneling level, plumb, true, and straight with no distortions. Shins as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96 -inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96 -inch horizontal variation from a true plane. C. Scribe and cut paneling to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel -hanger clips, splined connection strips, or blind nailing. Do not use face fastening unless covered by trim. END OF SECTION 06 42 14 STILE AND RAIL Bero Architecture PLLC 06 42 14-4 WOOD PANELING 14010.064214.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 06 46 00 - WOOD TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of wood trim shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. Interior standing and running trim. a. Base trim. b. Chair rail trim. c. Corner trim. d. Casing, jambs, and frames at banquette wall and new wall openings. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 3. Shop finishing of wood trim. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials and processes. B. Samples: 1. Lumber for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD TRIM, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood trim indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Custom. B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated for other types of transparent -finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building unless otherwise indicated. WOOD TRIM Bero Architecture PLLC 06 46 00-1 14010.064600.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1. Species: Red oak. 2. Cut: Plain sliced/plain sawn. 2.3 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood trim and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 5 to 10 percent. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Interior Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Edges of Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members except for members with ends exposed in finished work. C. Assemble casings in shop except where shipping limitations require field assembly. 2.6 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish wood trim at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood trim, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to end -grain surfaces. C. Transparent Finish for Interior Trim: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: System - 5, conversion varnish. WOOD TRIM Bero Architecture PLLC 06 46 00-2 14010.064600.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. a. Match existing wood trim finish in Okenshields Room 302. 4. Filled Finish for Open -Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash -coat sealer and allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 5. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60 -degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition wood trim to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install wood trim to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Install wood trim level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. C. Scribe and cut wood trim to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor wood trim to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. For shop -finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches long except where shorter single -length pieces are necessary. 1. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. END OF SECTION 06 46 00 WOOD TRIM Bero Architecture PLLC 06 46 00-3 14010.064600.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Ehnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 06 48 00 - WOOD FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of wood frames shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. Interior frames and jambs. a. For scheduled stile and rail wood doors. 2. Shop finishing wood frames and jambs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 8 "Stile and Rail Wood Doors" for door fabrication. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product of finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. C. Samples: Lumber for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD FRAME FABRICATORS A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Chautauqua Woods Fine Doors & Entryways. 2. E.F. Thresh Inc. WOOD FRAMES Bero Architecture PLLC 06 48 00-1 14010.064800.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 3. Heartwood Fine Windows and Doors. 4. Honeoye Falls Millwork. 2.2 WOOD FRAMES, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of wood frames indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 2.3 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Grade: Premium. B. Wood Species and Cut: Match species and cut indicated -for other types of transparent -finished architectural woodwork located in same area of building unless otherwise indicated. 1. Species: White oak. 2. Cut: Quarter sliced/plain sawn. 2.4 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of wood frame and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 5 to 10 percent. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Interior Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Provide self -drilling screws for metal -framing supports. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post -installed anchors. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood frames to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: Edges of Solid -Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated. WOOD FRAMES Bero Architecture PLLC 06 48 00-2 14010.064800.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 2.7 SHOP FINISHING A. General: Finish wood frames at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood frames, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood frames. Apply two coats to end -grain surfaces. C. Transparent Finish for Interior Frames: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System - 5, conversion varnish. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Filled Finish for Open -Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash -coat sealer and allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 5. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60 -degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition wood frames to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install wood frames to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B. Install wood frames level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C. Scribe and cut wood frames to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor wood frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1. For shop -finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed. END OF SECTION 06 48 00 WOOD FRAMES Bero Architecture PLLC 06 48 00-3 14010.064800.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elrnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 08 14 33 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of stile and rail doors shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. Interior stile and rail wood doors. 2. Finishing stile and rail wood doors. 3. Fitting stile and rail wood doors to frames and machining for hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 6 "Stile and Rail Wood Paneling" for stile and rail paneling. 2. Division 6 "Wood Frames" for wood frames. 3. Division 8 "Door Hardware" for door hardware schedule. 4. Division 8 "Glazing" for glass lites. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For stile and rail wood doors. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and other pertinent data. C. Samples: Represent typical range of color and grain for veneer and solid lumber required. Finish Sample with same materials proposed for factory -finished doors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements specified. 2.2 INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS A. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Interior custom doors. STILE AND RAIL Bero Architecture PLLC 08 14 33-1 WOOD DOORS 14010.081433.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Chautauqua Woods Fine Doors & Entryways. b. E.F. Thresh Inc. c. Heartwood Fine Windows and Doors. d. Honeoye Falls Millwork. 2. Grade: Premium. 3. Finish: Transparent. 4. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White oak, quarter sawed/sliced. 5. Door Construction for Transparent Finish: a. Stile and Rail Construction: Clear lumber; may be edge glued for width. b. Flat -Panel Construction: Veneered, wood -based panel product. 2.3 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for field fitting. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. C. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with solid wood moldings, with one side removable. Miter wood moldings at corner joints. 1. Leaded Glass Glazed Openings: Leaded glass lites shall be provided by one of the following approved studios: a. Clerkin Higgins Stained Glass, Inc. b. Cohoes Design Glass Associates, Inc. c. Jerome R. Durr Studios. d. Pike Stained Glass Studios Inc. e. Rohlfs Stained & Leaded Glass. f. Studio Restoration Inc. Single -source responsibility for fabricating and installing: a. Leaded glass in transom, stone mullions. b. Leaded glass lites in doors. D. Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction. 2.4 FINISHING A. Finish wood doors at woodworking shop. B. Transparent Finish: STILE AND RAIL Bero Architecture PLLC 08 14 33-2 WOOD DOORS 14010.081433.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System - 5, conversion varnish. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Filled Finish for Open -Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash -coat sealer and allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 5. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60 -degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware. B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Job -Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire - rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. END OF SECTION 08 14 33 STILE AND RAIL Bero Architecture PLLC 08 14 33-3 WOOD DOORS 14010.081433.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of door hardware shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. Mechanical door hardware for swing doors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 5 Section "Historic Treatment of Ornamental Metal" for fabrication and installation of custom door pulls. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. B. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. C. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC Al 17.1 for door hardware on doors in an accessible route. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements: a. Interior, Non -Fire -Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 3. Closers: Adjust door and gate closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the time required to move the door to a position of 12 degrees from the latch is 5 seconds minimum. DOOR HARDWARE Bero Architecture PLLC 08 71 00-1 14010.087100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Ehnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. a. Closers: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE Provide door hardware for scheduled door as listed in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule" Articles to comply with requirements in this Section. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 2 "Products". Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. References to BHhMA Designations: Provide products complying with these designations and requirements for description, quality, and function. 2.2 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. 1. Basis of design: Full mortise, heavy weight- ball bearing architectural hinge; Hager Company or comparable equivalent approved by Owner. 2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1. Provide strike as per Door Hardware Schedule. DOOR HARDWARE Bero Architecture PLLC 08 71 00-2 14010.087100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 2.4 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4 -inch throw; designed for mortising. into door edge. 1. Basis of design: 790F; Door Controls International or comparable equivalent approved by Owner. 2.5 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. 1. Basis of design: 9900 Series Mortise Lock Exit Device; Sargent, Assa Abbloy or comparable equivalent approved by Owner. 2.6 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices. 2.7 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Existing System: a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. B. Keys: Nickel silver or Brass. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner. 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. c. Grand Master Keys: Five. d. Great -Grand Master Keys: Five. 2.8 OPERATING TRIM A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; Custom door pulls and push plate by approved fabricator. DOOR HARDWARE Bero Architecture PLLC 08 71 00-3 14010.087100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Rooin - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1. Engage one of the following firms experienced in the treatment of ornamental metal similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project: a. Cardine Studios. b. Durand's Forge. c. Samuel Yellin Metalworkers. 2.9 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key -operated valves and forged -steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory -sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Basis of design: 351 Series; Sargent, Assa Abbloy, or comparable equivalent approved by Owner. a. Heavy-duty Parallel Arm. 2.10 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8. 1. Basis of design: 690 Series; Sargent, Assa Abbloy, or comparable equivalent approved by Owner. a. Hold open. b. Concealed mount. 2.11 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050 -inch- thick bronze; with manufacturer's standard machine or self -tapping screw fasteners. 2.12 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means DOOR HARDWARE Bero Architecture PLLC 08 71 00-4 14010.087100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 2.13 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. DOOR HARDWARE Bero Architecture PLLC 08 71 00-5 14010.087100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage Cornell University hardware consultant/shop to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Hinges 1. (3) pair 5"x5" BB 1279 Hager hinges. 2. Brass - US 10B. 3. 5 -knuckle. 4. Ball decorative tip. B. Exit device: 1. Sargent 9904 Mortise rim. 2. 814 open back strike. 3. USIOB. C. Manual flush bolts: 1. (2) DCI No. 790F. 2. US10B. Cylinder: 1. 41 mortise cylinder. 2. Brass -USIOB. E. Pull trim 1. Decorative wrought iron pull per Drawings. F. Closer 1. Sargent 351-P10, heavy-duty parallel arm. 2. Finish — 613E/USIOBE. G. Overhead Holder: 1. Sargent 698H. 2. Finish—US10B. H. Kickplate: 1. 0.50" thickness; 6 -inch x 25 -inch x US 10B. END OF SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE Bero Architecture PLLC 08 71 00-6 14010.087100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of glazing shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. Glass for doors and transoms. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 8 "Stile and Rail Wood Doors" for glazed opening in doors. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Division 8 "Stile and Rail Wood Doors" for qualified fabricators to be included in Project. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated -glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. GLAZING Bero Architecture PLLC 08 80 00-1 14010.08800.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. 2.9 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality -Q3. B. Heat -Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type 1, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality -Q3. 2.4 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer, ionomeric polymer interlayer, or cast -in-place and cured -transparent -resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. GLAZING Bero Architecture PLLC 08 80 00-2 14010.08800.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral -curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 2.6 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed -cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). GLAZING Bero Architecture PLLC 08 80 00-3 14010.08800.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Rooin - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as detennined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 3.2 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. GLAZING Bero Architecture PLLC 08 80 00-4 14010.08800.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure -Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure - glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. GLAZING Bero Architecture PLLC 08 80 00-5 14010.08800.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. 3.6 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass Type : Clear heat -strengthened float glass. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Circa 1900, Hollander's Restoration Window Glass or comparable approved equivalent. 2. Minimum Thickness: 4.5 mm. 3. Location: Transom lites of masonry opening. 3.7 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass Type: Clear laminated glass with two plies of heat -strengthened float glass. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Circa 1900, Hollander's Restoration Window Glass or comparable approved equivalent. 2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 4.5 mm. 3. Safety glazing required. 4. Location: Door lites in schedule double door. END OF SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING Bero Architecture PLLC 08 80 00-6 14010.08800.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of non-structural metal framing shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. Non -load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested according to ASTM E 119. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base -metal thickness. 1. ProSTUD by Clark Dietrich Building Systems or approved equivalent. 2. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. 3. Depth: 6 inches. B. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs: 1. Single Long -Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double -Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. C. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053 -inch minimum base -metal thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL Bero Architecture PLLC 09 22 16-1 FRAMING 14010.092216.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068 -inch- thick, galvanized steel. D. Cold -Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053 -inch uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch - wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Fuming Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated -steel thickness of 0.033 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 64l/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048 -inch- diameter wire. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, -Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048 -inch- diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. C. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.053 inch and minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. D. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.053 -inch uncoated -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch - wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL Bero Architecture PLLC 09 22 16-2 FRAMING 14010.092216.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Ehnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at tenninations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. E. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. hrstallation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL Bero Architecture PLLC 09 22 16-3 FRAMING 14010.092216.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 4. Do not attach hangers to rolled -in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 5. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL Bero Architecture PLLC 09 22 16-4 FRAMING 14010.092216.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of gypsum board shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. interior gypsum board. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced galvanized steel sheet. GYPSUM BOARD Bero Architecture PLLC 09 29 00-1 14010.092900.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: Interior Gypsum Board — Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Pref ll open joints and damaged surface areas. F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Pruner and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." H. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non -drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. I. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. END OF SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD Bero Architecture PLLC 09 29 00-2 14010.092900.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway March 24, 2014 Cornell University Ithaca, New York SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of acoustical panel ceilings shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Evaluation reports. C. Field quality -control reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. ACOUSTICAL PANEL Bero Architecture PLLC 09 51 13-1 CEILINGS 14010.095113.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL A. Glass -Fiber -Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. C. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Eclipse ClimaPlus; United States Gypsum Company. B. Classification: Type III, Fonn 1, Pattern El with Firecode. C. Color: White. D. LR: 0.86. E. NRC: 0.60, Type E-400 mounting according to ASTM E 795. F. CAC: 35 minimum. G. Edge/Joint Detail: Type FL -Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension -system members. H. Thickness: 3/4- inch. I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Centricitee DXLT; United States Gypsum Company. ACOUSTICAL PANEL Bero Architecture PLLC 09 51 13-2 CEILINGS 14010.095113.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Assembly is required to attain one-hour fire rating. Consult UL or manufacturer on proper installation techniques. B. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." C. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceiling plans. END OF SECTION 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL Bero Architecture PLLC 09 51 13-3 CEILINGS 14010.095113.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of tile carpeting shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. Modular, tufted carpet tile. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For carpet tile specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Sample warranty. C. MSDS for adhesives. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Work under this Section shall be performed by a firm with not less than five (5) years of successful experience with installation of commercial carpeting of type, quantity, and installation methods similar to work of this Section. 1. Work shall be performed by qualified and experienced mechanics working under an experienced supervisor who is knowledgeable and experienced with similar installations with a minimum of five (5) years of experience. 2. Installers firm's qualifications shall be submitted and approved by the Architect and Cornell University's Purchasing Department. TILE CARPETING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 68 13-1 14010.096813.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than five (5) years of production experience with carpet similar to type of this Section, and who written product literature indicates compliance with performance requirements of this Section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years minimum from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following manufacturer or comparable equivalent when approved by Owner: 1. Interface Americas RE. 2. Bentley Prince Street Broadloom. B. Color and Pattern: Match existing. C. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6. D. Fiber Type: Premium branded Nylon by Invista, Solutia, and Aquafil. E. Pile Characteristic: Tufted level loop pile. F. Density: 5,000 minimum G. Pile Thickness: 0,175 inch. H. Stitches: 9 per inch. I. Gage: 1/10 ends per inch. J. Total Weight: 61 oz/sy for finished carpet tile. TILE CARPETING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 68 13-2 14010.096813.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Ehnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 K. Primary Backing/Backcoating: Polybac GL Primary Backing. L. Secondary Backing: Actionbac Secondary Backing, moisture and stain resistant. M. Size: 12 by 12 inches, match existing exactly. N. Applied Soil -Resistance Treatment: Protekt, patented fluorchemical soil -resistant treatment. O. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134. 2. Flame Resistance: Passes Methylamine Pill Test DOC-FFI-70. 3. Flooring Radiant Panel Test: Passes ASTM E 648, Class 1. 4. CRI: IAQ Testing Program label required. 5. Smoke density test: Pass current industry standard test procedure. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, nonstaining, pressure -sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. Submit MSDS of all adhesives scheduled to be used. 2. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following approved for use with carpet tile specified: a. Interface Americas RE: Source Technologies, Inc. 1) Premium Multipurpose Adhesive 1000. 2) Premium Multipurpose Adhesive for Patterned Carpet 1100. 3) Grid -Set Green Glue 2000. 4) Performance Broadloom Adhesive 2100. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710. TILE CARPETING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 68 13-3 14010.096813.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Preparation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. E. Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. F. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full -spread, releasable, pressure -sensitive adhesive. G. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. H. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, pennanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. I. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. J. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or narked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. K. Install pattern to match existing adjacent carpet tile finish. L. Perforin the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face -beater element. M. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." END OF SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 68 13-4 14010.096813.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of interior painting shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual, including but not limited to surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Gypsum board. 2. Plaster. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. MSDS: For each type of product. C. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. INTERIOR PAINTING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 91 23-1 14010.099123.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated. B. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide paint products APPROVED BY CORNELL UNIVERSITY. Design based on products Benjamin Moore & Co or comparable products by one of the following manufacturer's: 1. Pratt& Lambert 2. Sherwin Williams. 3. ICI Paint Stores, Inc. (Akzo Nobel Paints: ICI Paints/Glidden Professional/Devoe). 4. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and to match existing adjacent wall surfaces typical unless noted otherwise. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer, Latex, Water Based: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Fresh Start High -Hiding All Purpose Primer (046). 2.4 WATER-BASED PAINTS A. Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1): INTERIOR PAINTING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 91 23-2 14010.099123.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elrnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Waterborne Ceiling Paint (508). B. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 4). 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Super Spec Interior Latex (Eggshell) (C274). 2.5 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water Cleaning.: Clean with water and bristle brush. B. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Mix 2 cups of tetrasodium polyphosphate, 1/2 cup of laundry detergent, 5 quarts of 5 -percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 15 quarts of warn water for each 5 gallon of solution required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 CLEANING A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 2. Remove dust, dirt, oil, grease, and sticky residue with job -mixed detergent solution; rinse thoroughly and allow to dry. Protect adjacent surfaces from cleaning process by masking surfaces. Detergent can damage metal, painted surfaces, stained wood, and glass. INTERIOR PAINTING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 91 23-3 14010.099123.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Ehnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 3. For heavy-duty cleaning where job -mixed detergent solution does not adequately remove residue, mix 1 cup tetrasodium polyphosphate with 3 quarts water. Apply in a limited amount to substrate and protect adjacent construction. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re -prime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. D. Material Preparation: 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. E. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure the compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. F. Scheduled Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practical after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touch-up painted. INTERIOR PAINTING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 91 23-4 14010.099123.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Ehnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 3.4 APPLICATION A. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. All spray work must be back -brushed or rolled, and all unpainted surfaces protected from overspray. B. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. C. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Re -coat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. D. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. C. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates (except as scheduled below): 1. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, Latex, Water-based; Fresh Start High -Hiding All Purpose Primer. INTERIOR PAINTING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 91 23-5 14010.099123.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, Super Spec Interior Latex (Eggshell). B. Ceilings, Gypsum Board and Plaster: 1. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, Latex, Water-based; Fresh Start High -Hiding All Purpose Primer. b. hitermediate Coat: Latex, flat, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat; Waterborne Ceiling Paint (Flat). END OF SECTION 09 91 23 INTERIOR PAINTING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 91 23-6 14010.099123.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elrnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 21 10 00 — FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Inside piping, including sprinkler heads, valves, hangers and supports, sleeves, and accessories. B. This Contractor shall include all piping, valves and devices necessary to provide protection system as shown in accordance with the requirements of NFPA Standard 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 1.02 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. Comply with all applicable rules and regulations of the municipal laws and ordinances and latest revisions thereof. All work shall be done in full conformity with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. Modifications required by the above authorities will be made without additional charges to the Owner. Where alterations to and/or deviations from the Contract Documents are required by the authorities, report the requirements to the Architect and secure approval before work is started. B. Work shall comply with codes and laws of New York State. These include but are not limited to: Building Code of New York State Fire Code of New York State C. The design, materials, and installation shall where applicable comply minimally with the following standards: NFPA 13 D. Organizations that have applicable standards include: ANSI American National Standards Institute ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing Materials FM FM Global/FM Approved OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. FIRE PROTECTION Bero Architecture PLLC 21 10 00-1 14010.21 1000.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elrnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sprinkler equipment and installations shall be in accordance with recommendations of Owner's Underwriters and approved by local Fire Commissioner. All components to be FM and U.L. Listed. B. Equipment and installation to meet requirements of NFPA No. 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data. B. Produce complete working drawings as defined by NFPA Standard 13 for review by local code officials and the owners insurance company if required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES A. Manufacturer and Type: Tyco or equal. 2.02 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Temperature rating on fusible links shall suit specific hazard areas. Provide temperature rating, response, coverage and K -factor appropriate for the location. Unless otherwise required or noted — Ordinary temperature, 1/". 5.6 K Factor. Sprinklers in apartments shall be listed for residential and for coverage. Provide sprinkler heads matching the existing K value and temperature. B. Standard Coverage Ceiling —Recessed pendent, glass bulb type. Quick response for light hazard. Tyco Ty -B, TY -FRB (match existing sprinkler rating and response). C. Sprinkler Finish: Finished Spaces — Chrome. Unfinished Spaces— natural brass. 2.03 PIPING A. Black Steel, UL listed, ASTM A-153, Schedule 40. B. Threaded fittings — Cast Iron Class 125, ANSI 16.4. Malleable Iron Class 300, ANSI B16.3. C. Grooved Piping - 2-1/2" minimum. Victaulic FireLock or equal. 1. Couplings — 300 PSI, rigid coupling, UL listed. Victaulic Style 005 2. Fittings — Ductile Iron. FIRE PROTECTION Bero Architecture PLLC 21 10 00-2 14010.21 1000.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 D. Do not use bushings or reducing couplings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide on wall near sprinkler valve, cabinet containing extra sprinkler heads of various styles, quantities as required, and wrench suitable to each head type. B. Install system in accordance with NFPA 13. Provide all accessories required (drains, test connections, etc.) C. Flush new piping prior to putting it in service. FIRE PROTECTION END OF SECTION 21 10 00 Bero Architecture PLLC 21 10 00-3 14010.21 1000.03314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 23 00 00 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR HVAC WORK (MECHANICAL) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Mechanical work can encompasses HVAC and others as defined elsewhere in the contract documents. Provide materials and labor required for complete working systems as shown on drawings and/or specified. B. Coordinate with other trades. The contractor shall coordinate work with other trades to insure the coordination of the installation of their work. Coordination includes review of other trade drawings that may affect the work and meetings with other trades. C. The contractor shall be experienced in the work to be performed and knowledgeable of applicable codes and standards. The contractor is expected to provide complete work in accordance with the drawings, specifications and generally accepted methods of construction. 1.02 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The plans are diagrammatic and indicate only the sizes and general arrangement of piping and equipment; exact locations of all elements shall be determined as work progresses, in cooperation with the work of other trades. It is not intended to show every item of work or minor piece of equipment, but every item shall be furnished and installed without additional remuneration as necessary to complete the system in accordance with the best practice of the trade. 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers and model numbers specified on the drawings are the standard of design with regard to performance, capacity and physical properties. B. Submit specific product data for equipment whether the specified manufacturer is used or a substitute is used. Submit installation data and wiring diagrams (if applicable). C. Unless specifically noted, the equipment specification is not intended to preclude the substitution of material and equipment by other manufacturers. The contractor is responsible for changes due to substitutions (electrical, capacity, support, etc.) D. If other manufacturers are named, it does not relieve the contractor from supplying equipment or materials that meet the design intent and from the capacity, electrical, and physical requirements of the installation. A named alternate manufacturer does not mean that the alternate manufacturer's standard equipment meets the specific criteria for the project. Named alternate manufacturers does not preclude the consideration of other manufacturers. GENERAL PROVISIONS Bero Architecture PLLC 23 00 00-1 FOR HVAC WORK 14010.230000.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elrnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 E. Unless modified by the drawings and specifications, install equipment as required by the manufacturer's instructions. 1.03 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. Comply with all applicable rules and regulations of the municipal laws and ordinances and latest revisions thereof. All work shall be done in full conformity with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. Modifications required by the above authorities will be made without additional charges to the Owner. Where alterations to and/or deviations from the Contract Documents are required by the authorities, report the requirements to the Architect and secure approval before work is started. B. Work shall comply with codes and laws of New York State. These include but are not limited to: Building, Code of New York State Mechanical Code of New York State Energy Conservation Construction Code of New York State Fire Code of New York State C. The materials, and installation shall where applicable comply minimally with the following standards: ANSI A117.1 ASHRAE Handbooks National Electric Code (NFPA 70) NFPA 90A SMACNA HVAC Metal Duct Standards D. Organizations that have applicable standards include: AGA American Gas Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing Materials NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air -Conditioning Contractors National Association UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. GENERAL PROVISIONS Bero Architecture PLLC 23 00 00-2 FOR HVAC WORK 14010.230000.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1.04 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall keep an accurate location record of all underground and concealed piping, and of all changes from the original design. He is required to furnish this information to the Owner prior to his application for final payment. B. At completion of the project, all changes and deviations from the Contract Documents shall be recorded by the Contractor. 1.05 RENOVATIONS A. Contractors shall verify exact existing conditions in the field and coordinate new work with these conditions. B. Contractors shall work with utilities and/or the building owners to find shut-off valves. Finding these valves or providing alternative means of shut-off remains the contractors responsibility. C. When removing materials or accessing hidden materials the contractor is responsible for restoring surfaces to match the existing adjacent surfaces. 1.06 BALANCING A. The environmental systems including all equipment, apparatus and distribution systems shall be tested and balanced in accordance with the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems published by NEBB, current edition. B. Submit balancing report. Report shall be on NEBB reporting forms. 1.07 SUPPORTS AND SEALANT A. Provide all required support for piping, duct and equipment. Provide appropriate vibration isolation for equipment. B. Provide sleeves for piping through walls and floor. Provide sealant for the space between the sleeve and the pipe for fire and smoke walls/partitions/floors, exterior walls and floors, waterproof walls and floors. C. Provide sealant and fire stopping for duct and piping. Sealant and fire stopping for fire rated walls/partitions/floors shall be listed for the use. D. Unless otherwise noted, run piping and duct as neatly and unobtrusively as possible. Where applicable run as high as possible. Coordinate with other trades. GENERAL PROVISIONS END OF SECTION 23 00 00 Bero Architecture PLLC 23 00 00-3 FOR HVAC WORK 14010.230000.03314 Willard Straight Hall - Eltnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 23 07 13 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Duct thermal insulation. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Fire Hazard Classification: All insulation except as otherwise noted shall have a composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive to secure jacket or facing) fire hazard rating as specified by ASTM E-84, NFPA 90A, 90B, 255 or WL 723 not to exceed 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed. Accessories, such as coatings, tapes and cloths, shall have the same component ratings as specified above. All insulation materials or their containers shall have a label indicating that they do not exceed the above fire hazard classification. B. Insulation Requirements: All materials, products, thicknesses and installation shall conform with ASHRAE Standard 90.1-1999 and the New York State Energy Conservation Construction Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. B. Submit shop drawings which indicate complete material data, a list of materials proposed for this project and indicate thickness of material for individual services. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Deliver material to job site in original non -broken factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's density and thickness. B. Perforn_work at ambient and equivalent temperatures as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: CertainTeed, Owens-Corning, Manville, Knauf. 2.02 GENERAL DUCT INSULATION Bero Architecture PLLC 23 07 13-1 14010.230713.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 A. Adhesives and Insulation Materials: Composite fire and smoke hazard ratings maximum 25 for Flame Spread and 50 for Smoke Developed. Adhesives to be waterproof. B. All "K" factors are expressed in BTU/in./hr./sq.ft. 2.03 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Exposed Rectangular Ducts: Rigid fibrous glass insulation, "K" value at 75°F, 0.22 with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier. CertainTeed 1B 600, 6 lbs/cu.ft. B. Exposed Round: Molded one-piece fiberglass pipe insulation, "K" value at 75°F, 0.23. CertainTeed Snap-On. C. Concealed Rectangular Ducts & Round Ducts: Flexible fibrous glass insulation with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier, "K" value at 75°F, maximum 0.29. CertainTeed Standard Duct Wrap, 1 lb. density. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Do not install covering before ductwork and equipment has been tested and approved. B. Ensure surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Ensure insulation is dry before and during application. Finish with system at operating conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Ensure insulation is continuous through inside walls. Pack around ducts with fireproof self-supporting insulation material, properly sealed. 2. Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions. 3. Locate insulation or cover seams in least visible locations. B. Exposed Rectangular Ducts: Insulation shall be fastened to duct with mechanical fasteners, spaced 12" to 18" on center with a minimum of two rows/side of duct. Secure insulation in place with washers firmly embedded in insulation. Secure rigid insulation with 50% coverage of adhesive. Seal joints and breaks with 4 -inch wide strips of open mesh glass cloth or tape imbedded between 2 coats of vapor barrier sealant. Point up other joints and breaks with hydraulic setting cement. DUCT INSULATION Bero Architecture PLLC 23 07 13-2 14010.230713.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elrnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 C. Exposed Round Ducts: Butt all joints tightly and apply a brush coat of fire -retardant lap adhesive to all laps and joint strips. Seal laps pulling jacketing tight and smooth. Elbows and Fittings: Insulate with compressed Universal fiberglass blanket secured in place with wire. All thicknesses to be equal to that of adjoining covering. Smooth out surface with insulating cement. Apply a fire -retardant coating to entire surface and embed into wet coat a layer of fiberglass cloth extending 2" onto adjacent covering. Apply finish coat of same coating to entire surface. D. Concealed Rectangular and Round Ducts: Adhere insulation to duct with fire - retardant adhesive in sufficient quantities to prevent sagging. Ducts with widths over 30" shall be further secured on underside with mechanical fasteners on maximum 18" spacings. All joints shall be overlapped a minimum of 2". E. Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to thermal movement or poor workmanship. 3.03 INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE Duct and Equipment R Value or Thicness (inch) Supply Ducts (un -lined) (Systems with Cooling Coils) R-5 DUCT INSULATION END OF SECTION 23 07 13 Bero Architecture PLLC 23 07 13-3 14010.230713.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 23 31 00 - DUCTWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Ductwork and plenums. B. Accessories -volume dampers, sealant. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Fabricate and install in accordance with SMACNA standards. B. NFPA 90A, Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems NFPA 90B, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. C. SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for HVAC Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. B. Submit duct shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ducts: Galvanized steel lock forming quality, having zinc coating, ASTM A 924 and A 653. G90 coating. B. Insulated flexible duct shall have inner liner. C. Sealant: Water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials. D. Duct liner: Johns Manville Pennacote Linacoustic Standard. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Duct to be constructed and reinforced in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard except as modified here or on the drawings. B. Seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard. D. Provide air foil type turning vanes for all mitered elbows. Radius elbows shall have a radius of 1.5 times the duct width minimum. DUCTWORK Bero Architecture PLLC 23 31 00-1 14010.233100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elrnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 E. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Maximum divergence upstream of equipment to be 30 degrees and 45 degrees convergence downstream. F. Round and oval duct shall be spiral seam. G. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure where easements exceed 10% duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area. H. Branch taps shall be 45 deg. tap type. Round branch from rectangular — tap to be a 45 deg. Rectangular with square -to -round transition. Round and oval taps — 45 deg. lateral fitting, 45 deg. lateral tap, or air flow type tap. I. Fasteners: Use rivets and bolts throughout; sheet metal screws accepted on low pressure ducts. J. Ducts to be painted shall be prepared. ASTM D 2092. K. Acoustical duct lining to be 1" thick unless otherwise noted. Install in accordance with NAIMA standards. Seal all edges in the shop. Seal edges in the field where cuts have to be made. Provide metal nosing over leading edge at lining near a fan discharge. 2.03 VOLUME DAMPERS A. Combination branch tap/volume damper, square -to -round. B. Round — Ruskin MDR25 C. Rectangle — Ruskin MD25 (12" max. either dimension), larger dampers shall be multi -blade. 2.04 DUCT SEALANT A. Low VOC. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. B. At each point where ducts pass through partitions, seal joints around duct with non- combustible material. END OF SECTION 23 31 00 DUCTWORK Bero Architecture PLLC 23 31 00-2 14010.233100.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Eltnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 26 00 00 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Provide materials and labor required for complete working systems as shown on drawings and/or specified. B. Coordinate with other trades. The contractor shall coordinate work with other trades to insure the coordination of the installation of their work. Coordination includes review of other trade drawings that may affect the work and meetings with other trades. Do not provide wiring to equipment supplied by other contractors or subcontractors until the actual location and electric requirements of the equipment has been verified. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for actively pursuing this information. 1.02 INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP A. The plans are diagrammatic and indicate only the sizes and general arrangement of piping and equipment; exact locations of all elements shall be determined as work progresses, in cooperation with the work of other trades. It is not intended to show every item of work or minor piece of equipment, but every item shall be furnished and installed without additional remuneration as necessary to complete the system in accordance with the best practice of the trade. B. Provide installation minimally in accordance with NECA NEIS standards. Provide installation beyond the standards if required by the project drawings and specifications. C. Provide wiring and equipment installation in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 70, National Electric Code. D. The contractor shall be experienced in the work to be performed and familiar with applicable codes, standards and local requirements. 1.03 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. This Contractor shall have the electrical work inspected by an approved inspection agency and shall pay all expenses incurred by same. At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall furnish a certificate of inspection indicating full approval of the work furnished and installed in this Contract. B. Work shall comply with codes and laws of New York State. These include but are not limited to: Building Code of New York State Fire Code of New York State GENERAL PROVISIONS Bero Architecture PLLC 26 00 00 -1 FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 14010.260000.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elrnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 C. The materials, and installation shall where applicable comply minimally with the following standards: ANSI A117.1 ANSI A17.1 — Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators Power company standards and regulations. National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72) National Electric Code (NFPA 70) D. Organizations that have applicable standards include: ANSI American National Standards Institute ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing Materials FM FM Global/FM Approvals ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act NECA National Electrical Contractors association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NESC National Electrical Safety Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. E. Comply with all applicable rules and regulations of the municipal laws and ordinances and latest revisions thereof. All work shall be done in full conformity with the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. Modifications required by the above authorities will be made without additional charges to the Owner. Where alterations to and/or deviations from the Contract Documents are required by the authorities, report the requirements to the Architect and secure approval before work is started. F. Furnish and file with the proper authorities, all drawings required by them in connection with the work. Obtain all permits, licenses, and inspections and pay all legal and proper fees and charges in this connection. G. Should any work shown or specified be of lighter or smaller material than Code requires, same shall be executed in strict accordance with the regulations. H. Heavier or larger size material than Code requires shall be furnished and installed, if required by the Plans and Specifications. Equipment and components parts thereof shall bear manufacturer's name- plate, giving manufacturer's name, size, type and model number or serial number, electrical characteristic to facilitate maintenance and replacements. Name plates of distributors or contractors are not acceptable. J. Owner will stop any work or use of any material that is not being properly installed and each Contractor shall remove all materials delivered, or work erected, which does not comply with GENERAL PROVISIONS Bero Architecture PLLC 26 00 00 -2 FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 14010.260000.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 Contract Drawings and Specifications, and replace with proper materials, or correct such work as directed by the Owner, at no additional cost to Owner. K. If equipment or materials are installed before proper approvals have been obtained, each Contractor shall be liable for their removal and replacement including work of other trades affected by such work, at no additional cost to Owner, if such items do not meet intent of the Drawings and Specifications. 1.04 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers and model numbers specified on the drawings are the standard of design with regard to performance, capacity and physical properties. B. Submit specific product data for equipment whether the specified manufacturer is used or a substitute is used. Submit installation data and wiring diagrams (if applicable). C. Unless specifically noted, the equipment specification is not intended to preclude the substitution of material and equipment by other manufacturers. The contractor is responsible for changes due to substitutions (capacity, support, etc.) D. If other manufacturers are named, it does not relieve the contractor from supplying equipment or materials that meet the design intent and from the capacity, and physical requirements of the installation. 1.05 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS A. The Electrical Contractor shall keep an accurate location record of all underground and concealed piping, and of all changes from the original design. He is required to furnish this information to the Owner prior to his application for final payment. B. At completion of the project, all changes and deviations from the Contract Documents shall be recorded by the Contractor. C. Three (3) corrected sets of all operating and maintenance instructions and complete parts lists bound in hard covers shall be furnished to the Owner. 1.06 FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide necessary foundations, supports, pads, bases, required for equipment, conduit, lighting fixtures, panels, racks, etc. If not specified provide support in accordance with generally excepted construction practice. B. For equipment where foundations are indicated or required, provide 4 inch high concrete pads, extending 6 inches beyond equipment base in all directions, with top edge chamfered. B. Where equipment is indicated or required to be floor -mounted on stands or legs, construct of structural steel members or steel pipe, fittings; brace, fasten with flanges bolted to floor. GENERAL PROVISIONS Bero Architecture PLLC 26 00 00 -3 FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 14o 10.260000.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 C. Where ceilings or wall mounting is indicated or required, use suspended platform, brackets or shelf, whichever is most suitable for equipment, its location. Construct of structural steel members, steel plates, rods, as required; brace, fasten to building structure or to inserts as reviewed. A. Design, construct supporting structures of strength to safely withstand stress to which the may be subjected, to distribute load, impact properly over building areas. Conform to applicable technical societies' standards, also to codes, regulations of agencies having jurisdiction. D. Paint steel work with one (1) prime coat for interior locations (exception — galvanized steel or steel with factory finish, threaded rods in unfinished locations). 1.07 CLEANING CONDUIT, EQUIPMENT A. Conduit, equipment: thoroughly cleaned of dirt, cuttings, other foreign substances. Should any conduit, other part of systems be stopped by any foreign matter, disconnect, clean wherever necessary for purpose of locating, removing obstructions. Repair work damaged in course of removing obstructions. 1.08 GROUNDING A. All electrical systems must be grounded in accordance with provisions of the National Electric Code. Provide all required accessories. 1.09 IDENTIFICATION A. Update existing pane]board directories if new connections are made. 1. ] 0 RENOVATIONS A. Contractors shall verify exact existing conditions in the field and coordinate new work with these conditions. B. Contractors shall work with utilities and/or the building owners to find circuits. Finding these circuits remains the contractor's responsibility. C. Contractor responsible for proper disposal of all materials removed (ballasts, etc.). 1.11 SUPPORTS AND SEALANT A. Provide all required support for wiring, conduit and equipment. B. Provide sleeves for penetrations of walls and floors. Provide sealant for the space between the sleeve and the pipe for fire and smoke walls/partitions/floors, exterior walls and floors, waterproof walls and floors. C. Provide sealant and fire stopping. Sealant and fire stopping for fire rated walls/partitions/floors shall be listed for the use. GENERAL PROVISIONS Bero Architecture PLLC 26 00 00 -4 FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 14010.260000.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Ehnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 D. Unless otherwise noted, run conduit as neatly and unobtrusively as possible. Where applicable run as high as possible. Coordinate with other trades. GENERAL PROVISIONS END OF SECTION 26 00 00 Bero Architecture PLLC 26 00 00 -5 FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 14010.260000.03314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 26 05 19 - WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes wiring, cables and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control and related systems rated 600 volts and less. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NEC requirements as to installation, materials and color coding. B. Provide products which are UL listed and labeled. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATED CONDUCTORS Conductors: Annealed uncoated copper or annealed coated copper in conformance with the applicable standards for the type of insulation to be applied on the conductor. Conductor sizes No. 16 and larger shall be stranded. ASTM B-3, ASTM B-174, ASTM B-8, UL -62. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: American Insulated Wire Corp.; Southwire Co C. Types: 1. XHHW: Moisture and heat resistant cross-linked polyethylene insulation rated 600V conforming to U.L. requirements for type XHHW insulation (75 degrees C wet and 90 degrees C dry). THWN-2: Polyvinylchloride insulation rated 600V with nylon jacket conforming to U.L. requirements for type THWN-2 insulation (90 degrees C). 3. THHN: Polyvinylchloride insulation rated 600V with nylon jacket conforming to U.L. requirements for type THHN insulation (90 degrees C). 4. MC: Insulated conductors, type XHHW with flexible metal armor conforming to U.L. requirements for type MC metal -clad cables. Connectors: Malleable iron set screw or 2 screw clamp type, and anti -short bushings. 2.02 CONNECTORS A. General: Provide UL type factory fabricated, metal connectors of sizes, capacity ratings, materials, types and classes as required for application as determined by the wire or cable manufacturer. B. Cable Terminations WIRE AND CABLE Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 19 -1 14010.260519.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1. Provide cable manufacturer terminations or termination specifically manfufactured for cable type of same or greater rating. 2.03 TAPES A. Insulation Tapes: 1. Vinyl Tape: ASTM D-3005 Type 2, UL 510, CSA C22.2, 3M Co. Scotch No. 88. 2. Rubber Tape: HHI-553C, MIL -I -3825B, ASTM D-4388, Type 3, 3M Co. Scotch No. 23. B. Moisture Sealing Tape: 600V UV resistant. C. Electrical Filler Tape: UL listed, 3M Co. Scotchfil. D Color Coding Tape: UL 510, CSA C22.2, 3M Co. Scotch No. 35;. E. Arc Proofing: Fire and arc proofing. 2.04 PULLING COMPOUNDS A. UL listed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install conductors in interior raceways after the raceway system is completed and finishes in specific work areas of the building are finished. B. Install conductors in exterior raceways after the raceway system is completed, except where indicated on drawings to be direct burial in earth. C. No grease, oil, or lubricant other than pulling compound specified for each type insulation may be used to facilitate the pulling -in of conductors. D. Use nylon line, polyethylene line, or manila rope as pull wires when installing conductors in aluminum or rigid non-metallic conduits. 3.02 CIRCUITING A. Do not change, group or combine circuits other than as indicated on the drawings. 3.03 COMMON NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR A. A common neutral may not be used. 3.04 CONDUCTOR SIZE WIRE AND CABLE Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 19 -2 14010.260519.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elnihirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 A. Install conductors of size shown on drawings. Where size is not indicated for branch circuit wiring, the minimum size allowed is No. 12 AWG. Where size is not indicated for control wiring, the minimum size allowed is No. 14 AWG. 1. Minimum size No. 12 for general use. At 120 volts and over 100 feet total circuit length, minimum size No. 10. At 277 volts and over 220 feet total circuit length, minimum size No. 10. Increase wire size as required on excessively long circuits to maintain a maximum voltage drop of 2% in branch circuits. 2. Control and alarm wire: Minimum size No. 14. At 120 volts and over 200 feet total circuit length, minimum size No. 12. Increase wire size voltage drop of 2%. 3. Increase raceway sizes as required where wire sizes have been increased for voltage drop. 3.05 CONNECTORS A. Splices: 1. Dry Locations: a. For conductors No. 8 or smaller, use spring type pressure connectors or indent type pressure connectors with insulating jackets. b. For conductors,No. 6 AWG or larger, use uninsulated indent type pressure connectors. Fill indentions with electrical filler tape and apply insulation tape to provide insulation equivalent to that of the conductor. 2. Damp Locations: As specified for dry locations, except apply moisture sealing tape over the entire insulated connection. 3. Wet Locations: Use uninsulated indent type pressure connectors and insulate with resin splice kits or heat shrinkable splices. B. Gutter Taps in Panelboards: Install gutter tap, fill indentions with electrical filler tape and apply insulation tape to provide insulation equipment to that of the conductors, or insulate with gutter tap cover. C. Terminations: 1. For conductors No. 10 AWG or smaller, use terminals for: a. Connecting control and signal wiring to terminal strips. b. Connecting wiring to equipment designed for use with terminals. 2. For conductors No. 8 AWG or larger, use lugs for: a. Connecting cables to flat bus bars. WIRE AND CABLE Bero Architecture PLLC 14010.260519.08314 26 05 19 -3 Willard Straight Hall - Elmlrirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 b. Connecting cables to equipment designed for use with lugs. 3. For conductor sizes larger than terminal capacity on equipment, reduce the larger conductor to the maximum conductor size that terminal can accommodate. Reduce section shall not be longer than 1'. Use bolted clamp type or pressure connections suitable for reducing connection. 3.06 COLOR CODING A. Color Code and Identification of feeders and branch circuits: 1. Install color coding tapes on feeders at terminations and at 1'0" intervals in gutters, pullboxes and manholes. Color code as follows: 120/208 Volt Phase A - black Phase B - red Phase C - blue Neutral - white Ground - green 277/480 Volt Phase A - brown Phase B - yellow Phase C - orange Neutral - white Ground - green 2. Identify interior feeders by feeder number and size in pullboxes and gutters with premarked self-adhesive tags. 3. Identify exterior feeders by feeder number and size in manholes with embossed aluminum tags and attach tags to cables with non-ferrous metal wire. 4. Identify street and grounds lighting conductors by circuit number and size in manholes, also in lighting standard bases if not connected to luminaire. Use embossed aluminum tags and attach tags to conductors with non-ferrous metal wire. 5. Install tags so that they are easily read without moving adjacent conductor or requiring removal of arc proofing tapes. 3.07 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR A. Install equipment grounding conductor where specified in other sections or indicated on the drawings. B. Equipment grounding conductor may be bare or identified with a continuous green color insulation. This conductor is not intended as a current canying conductor under normal operating circumstances. WIRE AND CABLE Bero Architecture PLLC 14010.260519.08314 26 05 19 -4 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 3.08 3.09 INSULATED CONDUCTOR SCHEDULE - TYPES AND USE A. XHHW, THWN or THHN: All wiring in dry locations (except where special type insulation is required). B. XHHW, or THWN: All wiring in damp locations (except where special type insulation is required). C. THWN: Wiring installed in existing raceway systems (except where special type insulation is required). D. THHN: Wiring when using fluorescent fixture body as a raceway system. E. MC: 1. Branch circuit wiring. in drywall partitions and above suspended ceilings. For surface mount panelboards provide wiring in conduit to the first junction box. WIRE AND CABLE END OF SECTION 26 05 19 Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 19 -5 14010.26051908314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 26 05 29 - SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes minimum materials and methods for support of electrical conduit and equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Furnish all fasteners and hardware compatible with the materials and methods required for attachment of supporting devices. 1. Concrete Inserts: Galvanized pressed steel plate complying with ASTM A 283; box - type welded construction with slot designed to receive steel nut and with knockout cover; hot -dipped galvanized in compliance with ASTM A 386. 2. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields complying with Federal Specification FF -S-325, 3. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, complying with Federal Specifications FF -B-588, Type, class and style as required. 4. Nuts, Bolts, Screws, Washers: a. General: Furnish zinc -coated fasteners, with galvanizing complying with ASTM A 153 for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Furnish fasteners for the type, grade and class required for the particular installation. B. "C" Bean Clamps: Threaded red type. Maleable iron with electroplated finish. C. Pipe Straps: Rigid steel conduit - one hole malleable iron type clamps with galvanized finish. EMT — two hole galvanized steel. D. Pipe Hanger: Steel lay -in or clevis type with galvanized finish. Lightweight clamp type hangers may be used for EMT. Angle clamps may be used to connect directly to steel. E. Channel Support System and Accessories: Furnish 12 gage galvanized steel channel and accessories. Provide pipe straps specifically designed for the channel support. SUPPORTING DEVICES Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 29-1 14010.260529.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Attachment of Conduit System: 1. Wood Construction: Attach conduit to wood construction by means of pipe straps or pipe clamps and wood screws or lag bolts. 2. Masonry Construction: Attach conduit to masonry construction by means of pipe straps or pipe clamps and masonry anchorage devices. 3. Steel Beams: Attach conduit to steel beams by means of "C" beam clamps and hangers. 4. Steel Decking: Support conduit from the structure where possible. 5. Multiple Parallel Conduit Runs: Use channel support system. 6. Conduit Above Suspended Ceiling: Do not reset conduit directly on runner bars, T - bars, etc. Do not support conduit from ceiling hangers. END OF SECTION 26 05 29 SUPPORTING DEVICES Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 29-2 14010.260529.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Raceways shall meet the requirements of NEMA, ANSI and Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. B. Applies to exterior raceways (unless superseded by another section). 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Waiver of Submittals: Submittals of product data for approval are not required for products specified by brand name if the specifically named product is provided for the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAYS A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized on the outside and enameled on the inside or hot dipped galvanized on the outside and inside. ANSI C80.1. Threaded type. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit: Steel, galvanized on the outside and enameled on the inside or hot dipped galvanized on the outside and inside. FSWW-C-581. C. Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing: Galvanized on the outside and coated on the inside. ANSI C80.3.. D. Flexible Steel Conduit: Zinc coated steel continuous strip spiral wound into interlocking convolutions. UL 1. E. Liquid -tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Conduit constructed of galvanized steel strip, continuous interlocked double wrapped coat with jacket of flexible PVC. UL 360. 2.02 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Connectors and Couplings: 1. Rigid and IMC Conduit: Galvanized steel threaded couplings as provided by the conduit manufacturer or threaded three piece steel/malleable iron coupling. 2. EMT: Zinc plated steel compression type or set screw type. 3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Zinc plated and chromate coated terminal connector with set screw connection. RACEWAYS, FITTINGS Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 33-1 AND ACCESSORIES 14010.260533.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 4. Liquid -tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide zinc plated and chromate coated steel, compression type terminal connector with gasket sealing rings. 5. %2" — 1" connectors for termination at device boxes and j -boxes shall be have nylon insulated throat. B. Conduit Bodies: Galvanized cast -metal conduit bodies is required to meet job and NEC requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY INSTALLATION A. Number of Circuits in Raceway: Each raceway shall enclose one circuit unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Homerun conduits niay contain three single pole circuits from separate phases, however the neutrals may not be combined. B. Conduit Size: Not smaller than 1/2" electrical trade size. Conduits size to be based on the National Electric Code. C. Conduit in Waterproofed Floors: Install conduit runs in waterproof floors to avoid penetrating the waterproofing. Avoid penetration of waterproofing with conduit risers so far as practicable. Where it is necessary to puncture the waterproofing for a conduit riser, install a standard weight steel pipe sleeve extending 1/2" above the finished floor level. Flash the steel pipe sleeve to the waterproofing with 16 ounce copper. Construct the flashing with a copper tube extending the full height of the sleeve, soldered to a copper base extending 6" in all directions from the sleeve. 2. The flashing will be integrated into the waterproofing by the Construction Contractor. Provide solid cast brass floor plates with chromium finish where pipe sleeves are exposed in rooms. D. Install Conduit Concealed: Install conduit for all circuit work concealed in the floors, ceilings, walls, or partitions of the building unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. If any portions of the conduit system cannot be installed concealed due to conditions encountered in the building, report such conditions and await approval before proceeding. 1. Run conduit in partitions vertically. 2. Conduits installed under or in floors below grade or underground shall have conduit threads painted with sealant before couplings are assembled. Coupling and conduit shall then be drawn up tight to ensure water tightness. RACEWAYS, FITTINGS Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 33-2 AND ACCESSORIES 14010.260533.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 E. Conduit Installed Exposed (areas without ceilings, to exposed panelboards, mechanical rooms, or as noted): 1. Install vertical runs perpendicular to the floor. 2. Install runs on the ceiling perpendicular or parallel to the walls. 3. Install horizontal runs parallel to the floor. 4. Conduits installed on flat surfaces in finished spaces shall be installed directly on the surface with straps.. 5. Installation of conduit directly on the floor will not be permitted. F. Materials in Conduit Runs: All conduits in a conduit run shall be of the same material. A combination of steel and aluminum conduit or fittings will not be permitted. G. Conduit Ends: 1. Arrange conduit terminations in cabinet with ends at the same level. Plug ends of conduits with caps to exclude foreign material until wiring is installed. 3. Use 2 locknuts and insulated bushing on end of each conduit entering cabinet or galvanized box (plastic bushing may be used on 1/2" & 3/4" conduit). 4. Use insulated grounding bushings on the ends of conduits which are not directly connected to the enclosure (such as stub -ups under equipment, etc.) and bond between bushings and enclosure with equipment grounding conductor. 5. Use insulated groundings bushings or grounding wedges on ends of conduit for tenninating and bonding equipment grounding conductors (when required) if cabinets or boxes are not equipped with grounding/bonding screws or lugs. H. Conduit Bends: For 1/2" and 3/4" conduits, bends may be made with manual benders. For all conduit sizes larger than 3/4", manufactured or field fabricated offsets or bends may be used. Make field fabricated offsets or bends with an approved hydraulic bender. 3.02 MAINTENANCE FIRE RESISTANCE A. Conduit and equipment shall be firestopped to prevent the passage of flame, smoke, fumes and hot gases. 3.03 RACEWAY SCHEDULE - TYPES & USE A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Install in all locations unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings. RACEWAYS, FITTINGS Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 33-3 AND ACCESSORIES 14010.260533.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 B. Intermediate Metal Conduit: May be installed in all locations except hazardous areas. C. Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing: 1. May be installed concealed as branch circuit conduits above suspended ceilings. 2. May be installed concealed as branch circuit conduits in hollow areas in dry locations. 3. Exposed in mechanical rooms. Do not install exposed in garages. D. Flexible Steel Conduit: Install equipment grounding conductor in the flexible steel conduit and bond at each box or equipment to which conduit is connected: Use for final conduit connection to recessed lighting fixtures in accessible suspended ceilings. Use 4 to 6 feet of flexible steel conduit (minimum size 1/2") between junction box and fixture. Locate junction box at least 1' from fixture and accessible if the fixture is removed. Use 1 to 2 feet of flexible steel conduit for final conduit connection to: Emergency lighting units Diy type transformers Motors with open, drip -proof or splash -proof housings Equipment subject to vibration (dry locations) RACEWAYS, FITTINGS END OF SECTION 26 05 33 Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 33-4 AND ACCESSORIES 14010.260533.08314 Willard Straight Hall - El hirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 26 05 34 - DEVICE AND JUNCTION BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Pull and Junction Boxes. B. Device and Outlet Boxes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Interior Dry Locations: Pressed steel, galvanized, conforming to UL Standard for outlet boxes and fittings with galvanized steel cover or extension ring as required to comply with NEC. 2.02 SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE BOXES - CONCEALED A. Nominal 2" x 3", 2-3/4" deep (or as required by the number of conductors). Knockouts. Mounting accessories and ganged as required. 2.03 LIGHTING FIXTURE BOXES A. 4 inch octagon. B. For lay -in type ceilings provide box hanger which mounts to two T -bars. Knockouts. C. For drywall ceilings provide support from two joists. 2.04 PULL AND SPLICE BOXES - 600 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Galvanized steel, reinforced, with removable covers secured by brass machine screws and constructed in accordance with Requirements of UL. B. 4" steel with knockouts and cover. 2.05 BOXES IN MASONRY A. Pressed steel masonry box, 2-1/2" deep (or as required by the number of conductors). Knockouts. 2.06 SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE BOXES - EXPOSED A. 4" X 2-1/8" pressed steel box, 2-1/8" deep (or as required by the number of conductors). Knockouts. DEVICE AND JUNCTION Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 34 -1 BOXES 14010.260534.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elrnhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 2.07 TELEPHONE/DATA OUTLET BOXES A. Same as receptacle. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Mount outlet boxes as shown on drawings and specified. B. Coordinate outlets with construction and built-in cabinets and equipment. C. Close unused openings in outlet boxes with knockout closers. D. Provide blank plates on outlet boxes in which no device is installed. DEVICE AND JUNCTION END OF SECTION 26 05 34 Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 34 -2 BOXES 14010.260534.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 26 05 80 - FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide listed firestop at penetrations of rated walls, partitions, ceilings, floors and assemblies. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire -rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Test Requirements: ASTM E 814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops" B. Test Requirements: UL 1479. "Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops" C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL publishes tested systems in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually. 1. UL Fire Resistance Directory: a. Firestop Devices (XHJI) b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXRH) c. Through -Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW) e. Forming Materials (XHKU) D. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments E. Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174, "Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops." F. ASTM E 84, "Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials." 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A manufacturer's direct representative to be on-site during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection and installation procedures. This will be done per manufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature and drawing details. B. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E 814 or UL 1479 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. FIRESTOPPING FOR Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 80-1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 14010.260580.083 14 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job -site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire -resistance -rated systems. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) listed in Volume II of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below: 1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma 800-879-8000/www.us.hilti.com 2. Accepted equal. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479 or ASTM E 814 tested for specific fire - rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire -rating involved for each separate instance. B. Cast -in place firestop devices are installed prior to concrete placement for use with non- combustible and combustible plastic pipe (closed and open systems), conduit, or electrical cable bundles penetrating concrete floors, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 680 Cast -In Place Firestop Device 2. Hilti CP 682 Cast -In Place Firestop Device for use with noncombustible penetrants C. Sealants, foams or caulking materials for use with non-combustible items including rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable: FIRESTOPPING FOR Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 80-2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 14010.260580.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 1. Hilti FS -ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 3. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 4. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant D. Intumescent sealants, caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles, and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS -ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant E. Foams, intumescent sealants, or caulking materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS -ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 3. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 4. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant Non curing, re -penetrable intumescent putty or foam materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick 2. Hilti CP 658T Firestop Plug G. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad H. Materials used for large openings and complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays and bundles, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 637 Firestop Mortar 2. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 3. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 4. Hilti CP 675T Firestop Board I. Non curing, re -penetrable materials used for large openings and complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays and bundles, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 2. Hilti CP 675T Firestop Board Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E 814 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. FIRESTOPPING FOR Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 80-3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 14010.260580.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials. 2. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may affect proper adhesion. 3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials. 4. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping. 5. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast -in-place Firestop Devices with trade responsible for the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through -penetration materials. 1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal. 2. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. FIRESTOPPING FOR Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 80-4 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 14010.260580.03314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 C. Inspection of through -penetration firestopping shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E 2174, "Standard Practice for On -Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops" or other recognized standard. D. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades. FIRESTOPPING FOR END OF SECTION 26 05 80 Bero Architecture PLLC 26 05 80-5 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 14010.260580.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Plate covers. D. Occupancy Sensors. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Provide UL approved devices. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Arrow Hart 3. General Electric 4. Wattstopper 5. Prescolite 2.02 WALL SWITCHES A. 120/277 Volt Switches: Quiet slow make, slow break design, toggle handle, with totally enclosed case, rated 20 ampere, specification grade. Provide matching two pole, 3 way, and 4 way switches. B. Switch and Pilot Light: Push action type with red handle, integral long -life neon pilot light, rated at 15 ampere, 120 volts. C. Color: Provide ivory switches except where wall finish is wood or dark, use brown switches. 2.04 RECEPTACLES A. Standard Duplex Receptacles: Full gang size, polarized, duplex, parallel blade, U -grounding slot, specification grade, rated at 20 amperes, 125 volts, designed for split feed service. WIRING DEVICES Bero Architecture PLLC 26 27 26 -1 14010.262726.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 B. Color: Provide ivory receptacles in areas with light wall finish. Provide brown receptacles in areas with wood or dark wall finish. 2.05 PLATE COVERS A. Flush Mounting Plates: 302/304 stainless steel satin finish beveled type with smooth rolled outer edge. Smooth nylon with color matching the device. 2.06 OCCUPANCY SENSORS/LIGHTING CONTROL A. Ceiling Sensors 1. Ultrasonic motion -sensing. 2. Adjustable time delay from 15 seconds to 15 minutes. 3. Adjustable sensitivity setting. 4. Manual override switch in sensor for maintenance use. 5. Provide required switchpack and wiring. 6. Watt Stopper W. C. General 1. All wiring and conduit between switchpacks and room sensors has been omitted from the drawings. Verify with the manufacturer all wiring requirements. Provide all necessary wiring and conduits, switchpacks, room sensors, lighting fixtures and wall switches. 2. The system has been designed based on the above indicated equipment. Any equipment substitutions shall be provided with drawings and specifications confining the substituted system functions as the designed system. Provide all additional components (at no additional cost) to accommodate original design. 3. Adjust each sensor to assure proper lighting control of all fixtures. Each sensor sensitivity should be set to assure corridor movement does not effect individual room control. Sensor operation shall be acceptable to the Owner and Engineer before final acceptance. 4. Mount sensors a minimum of 4' from air distribution equipment and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount switches 44 inches above floor, unless otherwise noted. Coordinate switch mounting location with architectural detail. WIRING DEVICES Bero Architecture PLLC 26 27 26 -2 14010.262726.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway Cornell University Ithaca, New York March 24, 2014 B. Mount receptacles vertically at 18 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise noted, with grounding pole at top. C. Coordinate receptacles with counters, built-in desks and other architectural details. Mount receptacles over counters and at rest room lavatories at 44" AFF unless otherwise required by the situation. WIRING DEVICES END OF SECTION 26 27 26 Bero Architecture PLLC 26 27 26 -3 14010.262726.08314 CORNELL UNIVERSITY WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL FACILITIES CONTRACTS ELMHIRST ROOM 121 HUMPHREYS SERVICE BUILDING EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853-3701 ADDENDUM NO. 1 APRIL 25, 2014 This Addendum contains changes to the requirements of the Contract Documents and Specifications. Such changes are to be incorporated into the Construction Documents and shall apply to the work with the same meaning and force as if they had been included in the original document. Wherever this Addendum modifies a portion of a paragraph of the specifications or a portion of any Drawing, the remainder of the Paragraph or Drawing shall remain in force. NOTE: Provisions of all Contract Documents apply. Item 1. Bid Form REPLACE Page BF-6 in its entirety with BF-6R, attached. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Item 2. Section 01 21 00 Allowances REPLACE Page 01 21 00-2 in its entirety with 01 21 00-2R, attached. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Item 3. Section 08 14 33 Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Part 2.2, A., INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS ADD 6. Size: As per Drawing 3/A-50, Kimball Room Enlarged Elevation. 7. Thickness: 1-3/4- inch thick. Item 4. Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware: Part 3.3, DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE DELETE Item H; Kickplate. REPLACE with H. Kickplate: 1. 0.050” thickness; 6-inch x 25-inch x US10B. 2. Square corner; 4-sided beveled. ADD I. Push Plate: 1. 0.050” thickness; 2-3/4-inch x 8-1/2-inch x US10B. 2. Square corner; beveled. Item 5. Section 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting DELETE Section 09 68 13; Tile Carpeting in its entirety REPLACE with Revised 09 68 13, attached. Item 6. Drawing A-50, Detail 3/A-50; Kimball Room Enlarged Elevation DELETE “Provide cut limestone quoins to match existing.” REPLACE with “Allowance No. 1: Provide cut limestone quoins to match existing.” Item 7. Exploratory Photos Photos of Underfloor Exploratory: Photos taken during exploratory opening of existing raised platform of Kimball Room; Room 302a. for Contractor’s reference only. Item 8. RFI Questions and Clarifications See attached RFI Log (Items 1 – 5) Attachments: BF-6R 01 21 00-2R 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting Exploratory Photos RFI Log (Items 1-5) ****END OF ADDENDUM ONE**** Spec in Base Bid Section Trades and/or Subdivision Labor Material Division 1 General Requirements Division 2 Masonry & Concrete Demolition Balance of Selective Demolition Division 4 Masonry Division 5 Metals 06 42 14 Stile and Rail Wood Paneling 06 48 00 Wood Frames Division 6 Balance of Wood, Plastics and Composites 08 14 33 Stile and Rail Wood Doors 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing Division 9 Finishes Division 21 Fire Suppression Division 23 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Division 26 Electrical Drawings Shoring Structural Steel Concrete Allowance No. 1 – Stone Fabrication $5,000 Total Total Combined Bid $ ADDENDUM NO. 1 BID FORM BF-6R 1.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES (REVISED) A. ALLOWANCE NO. 1, Stone Fabrication ($5,000): Description: - Indiana Limestone ASTM C568 Cat II jamb trim stones (quoins) as indicated on Drawing 3/A- 50. Profile, color, and finish to match existing trim to remain. Height as indicated on drawings. - Fabricator to field measure/profile (template) existing trim or, alternatively, to pick up removed trim for use as template. - Fabricator to deliver and offload new trim at job site. General Contractor to coordinate stone fabricator, Adam Ross Cut Stone Co., Inc. as identified in Section 04 01 40 “Stone Masonry Restoration,” Part 2.3 Limestone E.1. and E.2. Templating (or trim pickup) to occur no later than June 16, 2014. PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 – EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 21 00*** WILLARD STRAIGHT HALL 01 21 00-2R ELMHIRST ROOM ALLOWANCES April 24, 2014 EXIT ACCESS DOORWAY (Addendum No. 1) Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway April 24, 2014 Cornell University REVISED Ithaca, New York SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The work to be done under this section includes all equipment, labor, materials, and accessories required for the furnishing, setting in place, and completion of tile carpeting shown on the Drawings or called for in the Project Manual including but not limited to: 1. Modular, tufted carpet tile. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For carpet tile specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. B. Sample warranty. C. MSDS for adhesives. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Work under this Section shall be performed by a firm with not less than five (5) years of successful experience with installation of commercial carpeting of type, quantity, and installation methods similar to work of this Section. 1. Work shall be performed by qualified and experienced mechanics working under an experienced supervisor who is knowledgeable and experienced with similar installations with a minimum of five (5) years of experience. 2. Installers firm’s qualifications shall be submitted and approved by the Architect and Cornell University’s Purchasing Department. TILE CARPETING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 68 13-1 14010.096813.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway April 24, 2014 Cornell University REVISED Ithaca, New York B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturer with not less than five (5) years of production experience with carpet similar to type of this Section, and who written product literature indicates compliance with performance requirements of this Section. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years minimum from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product: 1. Cubic; Interface Americas RE. a. Provide samples to verify color and product line matches existing Okenshields carpet exactly. b. Color: Angle; 4853. c. Pattern: Non-directional. B. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6. C. Fiber Type: Premium branded Nylon by Aquafil. D. Pile Characteristic: Tufted textured loop. E. Pile Density: 6,968 oz/c yd. F. Pile Thickness: 0.093-inch. G. Stitches: 8.2 per inch. H. Gage: 1/12 ends per inch. TILE CARPETING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 68 13-2 14010.096813.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway April 24, 2014 Cornell University REVISED Ithaca, New York I. Tufted Yarn Weight: 18 oz/sy. J. Primary Backing/Backcoating: GlasBac. K. Size: 50 cm by 50 cm, match existing exactly. L. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Protekt, patented fluorchemical soil-resistant treatment. M. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.0 kV according to AATCC 134. 2. Flame Resistance: Passes Methylamine Pill Test DOC-FFI-70. 3. Flooring Radiant Panel Test: Passes ASTM E 648, Class 1. 4. CRI: IAQ Testing Program label required. 5. Smoke density test: ASTM E 662 less than or equal to 450. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. Submit MSDS of all adhesives scheduled to be used. 2. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following approved for use with carpet tile specified: a. Interface Americas RE: Source Technologies, Inc. 1) As recommended in writing for project application. a) Premium Multipurpose Adhesive 1000. b) Premium Multipurpose Adhesive for Patterned Carpet 1100. c) Grid-Set Green Glue 2000. d) Performance Broadloom Adhesive 2100. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. TILE CARPETING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 68 13-3 14010.096813.08314 Willard Straight Hall - Elmhirst Room - Exit Access Doorway April 24, 2014 Cornell University REVISED Ithaca, New York B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Preparation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. E. Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. F. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive. G. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. H. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. I. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. J. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. K. Install pattern to match existing adjacent carpet tile finish. L. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. M. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." END OF SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING Bero Architecture PLLC 09 68 13-4 14010.096813.08314 Willard Straight Hall – Elmhirst Room – Exit Access Doorway Photos of Underfloor Exploratory Photo A Looking North (Towards Kitchen in Okenshields) Photo B: Looking South (mechanical shaft) Willard Straight Hall – Elmhirst Room – Exit Access Doorway Photos of Underfloor Exploratory Photo C: Looking East (wall separating Kimball Room and Elmhirst Room) Photo D: Looking West Willard Straight Hall – Elmhirst Room – Exit Access Doorway Photos of Underfloor Exploratory Photo E: Looking Northwest Plan Sketch Willard Straight Hall-Elmhirst Room Exit Access Doorway Date: April 25, 2014 RFI Form RFI/Page/ Response Dwg./Spec./Rep.Section/Design Team Index Number Paragraph/Topic RFI Response 1 E-11 Electrical Notes Question raised if emergency circuitry for lighting and/or exit signs exists. There is no known emergency lighting circuitry in these spaces. The Owner stated the building has a standby generator for emergency lighting. 2 Section 08 14 33 Stile and Rail Wood Doors Question on thickness of doors See Addendum No. 1, Item 3. 3 Bid Form BF-6 Provide additional information on Allowance No. 1 See Addendum No. 1, Item 1 and Item 2. 4 Section 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting What is the carpet tile specified?See Addendum No. 1, Item 5. 5 Drawing A-50, Detail #5, Enlarged Plan at Transom How will leaded glass in transom be glazed, and from what side? Match existing conditions of transoms in Elmhirst Room. Set in existing stone rebate to match existing.